# Tenant Configuration

Tenant-level configuration guide for extensions, DIDs, media files, conditions, IVRs, queues, phones, routing objects, reports, and other tenant menu entries.

# Extensions

# Overview

The **Extensions** page is the tenant-level list for creating, finding, editing, importing, exporting, and deleting extensions. Open it from **Configuration** &gt; **Extensions**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots show ten fake demo extensions, numbered **100** through **109**, with a mix of chan\_sip, PJSIP, custom, and virtual extension types. SIP and PJSIP usernames use the extension number followed by the tenant code, for example `100-CANISTRACCI`. Password values are masked in the screenshots.

## Display modes

The Extensions page can be shown in DataTable mode or jqGrid mode. Use the display mode toggle in the toolbar to switch between them.

### DataTable mode

<figure id="bkmrk-extensions-page-in-d">![Extensions page in DataTable display mode with demo extensions 100-109.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/extensions-datatable.png)<figcaption>Extensions page in DataTable display mode with demo extensions 100-109.</figcaption></figure>DataTable mode shows the standard table with search, page-size selection, sorting, row checkboxes, and action buttons above the table.

### jqGrid mode

<figure id="bkmrk-extensions-page-in-j">![Extensions page in jqGrid display mode with demo extensions 100-109.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/extensions-jqgrid.png)<figcaption>Extensions page in jqGrid display mode with demo extensions 100-109.</figcaption></figure>jqGrid mode shows the same extension records in the advanced grid with column filters and grid toolbar actions.

## Toolbar actions

<figure id="bkmrk-extensions-toolbar-w">![Extensions toolbar with creation, display mode, and upload controls.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/2RFextensions-toolbar.png)<figcaption>Extensions toolbar with creation, display mode, and upload controls.</figcaption></figure><table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"> <thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead> <tbody> <tr><td>New SIP peer / New PJSIP peer</td><td>Creates a standard phone extension. The visible label follows the tenant's preferred SIP stack.</td></tr> <tr><td>Bulk SIP peers</td><td>Opens the bulk creation workflow for adding multiple SIP extensions at once.</td></tr> <tr><td>Custom Extension</td><td>Creates an extension that routes to a custom dial string or custom endpoint logic.</td></tr> <tr><td>Virtual Extension</td><td>Creates a virtual extension that can group or reference other extension destinations.</td></tr> <tr><td>Change to chan\_sip</td><td>Converts selected PJSIP extensions to chan\_sip when the administrator has permission to switch phone technology.</td></tr> <tr><td>Change to PJSIP</td><td>Converts selected chan\_sip extensions to PJSIP when the administrator has permission to switch phone technology.</td></tr> <tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected extensions after a confirmation prompt. This action is shown only when delete permission is available.</td></tr> <tr><td>Display mode toggle</td><td>Switches the page between the standard DataTable and jqGrid display modes.</td></tr> <tr><td>CSV/XLS Upload</td><td>Opens the import page for uploading extension records from a CSV or XLS file.</td></tr> </tbody></table>

## Extension table

<figure id="bkmrk-extensions-grid-show">![Extensions grid showing mixed SIP, PJSIP, custom, and virtual extensions.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/t8Gextensions-table.png)<figcaption>Extensions grid showing mixed SIP, PJSIP, custom, and virtual extensions.</figcaption></figure>Use the table controls to filter, sort, select columns, export data, and move between pages. The checkbox column selects rows for bulk actions.

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-nu"> <thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead> <tbody> <tr><td>Number</td><td>Extension number. When extension status is enabled, an icon indicates registration or device state.</td></tr> <tr><td>Name</td><td>Extension display name. Icons can indicate call blocking/filtering, DND, unconditional forwarding, or PIN lock.</td></tr> <tr><td>Description</td><td>Free-form extension description. Icons can identify PJSIP, custom, virtual, or recording-related behavior.</td></tr> <tr><td>Tech</td><td>Extension technology. SIP entries are chan\_sip peers, PJSIP entries are PJSIP endpoints, CUSTOM entries route to custom dial strings, and VIRTUAL entries group other extensions.</td></tr> <tr><td>Username</td><td>SIP/PJSIP username used by the phone or endpoint. The default pattern is `<extension number>-<tenant code>`. Clipboard, SRTP, and TLS indicators can appear for phone extensions.</td></tr> <tr><td>Password</td><td>Endpoint secret when password display is enabled. Depending on settings, the value can be hidden or revealed with an eye icon.</td></tr> <tr><td>Action</td><td>Contains quick actions such as showing the extension call flow. Fast provisioning QR code access can also appear when enabled.</td></tr> </tbody></table>

## Editing extensions

Select the extension number, name, description, username, or password cell to open the extension edit form. In jqGrid mode, select a row and use the grid edit action; the grid opens the same edit form.

## jqGrid mode

The display mode toggle can enable jqGrid for the Extensions page. In jqGrid mode, the same extension records are loaded dynamically, and the grid adds toolbar actions for edit, delete, search, column selection, CSV export, and showing the selected extension flow.

## Permissions and limits

Some buttons are hidden when the user lacks permission or when the tenant has reached its extension limit. The page also respects user extension restrictions, so administrators may see only the extensions assigned to their profile.

# Create and Edit chan_sip Extensions

Use this page to create or edit a phone extension that registers as a chan\_sip peer. The form works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar.

The screenshots use the **Canistracci Oil** demo extension **100 Alex Reed**. Creating and editing use the same form: a new extension opens with tenant defaults, while an existing extension opens with saved values.

## Creating and editing

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescriptioncre"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Open Configuration &gt; Extensions and select New SIP peer. Fill the required fields and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open an existing extension from the Extensions list. Update the required fields and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>When delete permission is available, open the extension and select Delete. Confirm only after checking routing, phones, queues, and other references.</td></tr></tbody></table>

For chan\_sip extensions, the endpoint username normally uses the extension number, a hyphen, and the tenant code, such as 100-CANISTRACCI. Press the swapped-arrow icon beside Username to switch the separator from a hyphen to an underscore, for example 100\_CANISTRACCI. If custom usernames are enabled in Admin &gt; Settings, you can enter a username that does not follow the generated tenant-code pattern.

## Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/1iIchan-sip-information.png)<figcaption>Information section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for the extension identity, endpoint credentials, media basics, groups, voicemail message-waiting indication, DND state, and inbound ring timeout.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposenumber-a"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Number and name</td><td>Number is the internal extension number. Name is the display name used in lists, caller ID, and reports.</td></tr><tr><td>Description and emergency notes</td><td>Description is an administrator note. Emergency notes can be used by emergency routing and notification logic.</td></tr><tr><td>SIP stack</td><td>Shows whether the endpoint is using chan\_sip or PJSIP. Users with switch permission can change the stack from this form or from the Extensions list.</td></tr><tr><td>Username and password</td><td>Endpoint credentials used by the phone or softphone. The default username pattern is the extension number followed by the tenant code.</td></tr><tr><td>Codecs and DTMF</td><td>Controls the allowed audio/video codecs and DTMF signaling mode used by the endpoint.</td></tr><tr><td>Media and groups</td><td>Direct media, call groups, pickup groups, spy groups, and message-waiting options control how the endpoint participates in calls and monitoring.</td></tr><tr><td>Voicemail, DND, and timeout</td><td>Voicemail MWI, DND, and inbound dial timeout control how incoming calls are presented and how long the extension rings.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Trunk mode

<figure id="bkmrk-additional-trunk-mod">![Additional trunk mode options visible after enabling Trunk on a chan_sip extension.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/chan-sip-trunk-mode-options.png)<figcaption>Additional trunk mode options visible after enabling Trunk on a chan\_sip extension.</figcaption></figure>Enable **Trunk** only when the chan\_sip peer is another PBX, gateway, or upstream device that should receive calls by dialed number rather than as a single telephone endpoint. A normal phone extension should usually leave this option disabled.

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optioneffec"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Effect</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Trunk</td><td>Changes how calls are sent to the peer. With trunk mode disabled, MiRTA PBX dials the peer username. With trunk mode enabled, MiRTA PBX dials the called number at that peer, or the configured DID override when one is set.</td></tr><tr><td>DID Number</td><td>Automatic sends the original called number to the peer. Set to sends the value entered in the DID number field instead, which is useful when the downstream PBX or gateway expects a fixed pilot number or a rewritten DID.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID Number Override</td><td>Controls which outbound caller ID values are preserved from the SIP INVITE received from the trunk device. The default behavior can keep both caller ID name and number from the INVITE. The other choices keep only the number, keep only the name, or ignore the INVITE caller ID and use the caller ID configured on the extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Emergency CallerID Number Override</td><td>For emergency routes, Get Emergency CallerID from SIP Invite allows the emergency caller ID sent by the trunk device to pass through. Do not use Emergency CallerID from SIP Invite makes MiRTA PBX replace it with the extension emergency caller ID, or the tenant default emergency caller ID when the extension does not define one.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID Number Source</td><td>Selects where inbound trunk caller ID is read from when a specific source is required. Automatic keeps the caller ID parsed by Asterisk. The explicit choices read the From, P-Asserted-Identity, P-Preferred-Identity, or Remote-Party-ID header and use it to set caller ID before routing.</td></tr></tbody></table>

In the dialplan, trunk mode also affects direct calls to this extension. If the peer is registered on the current server or has a static host, the call is built as a trunk-style dial to the peer using the dialed number. If the peer is registered on another node, MiRTA PBX sends the call through the configured inter-node SIP trunking module.

## NAT Control

<figure id="bkmrk-nat-control-section-">![NAT Control section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ofgchan-sip-nat-control.png)<figcaption>NAT Control section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to control endpoint reachability and keepalive behavior for devices behind NAT or with changing network paths.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposenatdefin"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>NAT</td><td>Defines how MiRTA PBX treats NAT traversal for the endpoint.</td></tr><tr><td>Qualify and qualify frequency</td><td>Controls whether the PBX checks endpoint reachability and how often checks are sent.</td></tr><tr><td>Keep alive and RTP keep alive</td><td>Sends periodic traffic to keep network mappings open and detect unavailable devices.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Call Settings

<figure id="bkmrk-call-settings-sectio">![Call Settings section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/xKzchan-sip-call-settings.png)<figcaption>Call Settings section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for call behavior that is not specific to inbound or outbound routing.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposefax-and-"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Fax and volume</td><td>Controls T.38 fax behavior and transmit/receive volume adjustments.</td></tr><tr><td>Music on hold and language</td><td>Selects media behavior and the preferred language for prompts played to the extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Directories and phone books</td><td>Controls whether the extension appears in dial-by-name directories and phone book generated lists.</td></tr><tr><td>Call waiting and autoanswer</td><td>Controls second-call handling and optional automatic answer behavior for supported phones.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Inbound Recording

<figure id="bkmrk-inbound-recording-se">![Inbound Recording section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/XTuchan-sip-inbound-recording.png)<figcaption>Inbound Recording section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for recording behavior applied to calls received by the extension.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeinbound-"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Inbound recording policy</td><td>Controls whether inbound calls are recorded and whether recording privacy behavior is enabled.</td></tr><tr><td>Recording notifications</td><td>When enabled, recordings can be mailed and processed according to tenant recording settings.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Outbound Recording

<figure id="bkmrk-outbound-recording-s">![Outbound Recording section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/KYEchan-sip-outbound-recording.png)<figcaption>Outbound Recording section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for recording and post-processing behavior applied to calls placed by the extension.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposealways-r"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Always record</td><td>Controls whether outbound calls from this extension are recorded, unless tenant-wide settings force recording.</td></tr><tr><td>Email recording to</td><td>Sends matching recordings to the configured address. Minimum size can suppress very small recordings.</td></tr><tr><td>Transcript, summary, sentiment</td><td>Enables transcript, summary, and sentiment processing when the tenant supports those services.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Security

<figure id="bkmrk-security-section-for">![Security section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/DMfchan-sip-security.png)<figcaption>Security section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to restrict registration, authentication, abuse behavior, cost limits, and outbound availability.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeauthenti"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Authentication and network filters</td><td>Controls endpoint trust, allowed IPs, and authentication-related behavior.</td></tr><tr><td>Abuse detection and cost limits</td><td>Locks or warns on suspicious or excessive usage according to tenant policy.</td></tr><tr><td>Outbound destinations</td><td>Allows all calls, blocks calls, or applies a destination regex filter.</td></tr><tr><td>Lock PIN and max duration</td><td>Allows the extension to be locked and caps outbound call duration.</td></tr><tr><td>Working hours</td><td>Restricts outbound calling to the selected weekday condition.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Web User Panel and Switchboard

<figure id="bkmrk-web-user-panel-and-s-1">![Web User Panel and Switchboard section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/aVpchan-sip-web-user-panel-and-switchboard.png)<figcaption>Web User Panel and Switchboard section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to enable user-facing web access and related application permissions for the extension.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeaccess-t"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Access toggles</td><td>Enables the user panel, web phone, switchboard, and optional custom user application.</td></tr><tr><td>Web user and password</td><td>Sets the login identity and password. If no web user is specified, the endpoint username is used.</td></tr><tr><td>Password policy and 2FA</td><td>Controls expiry, forced change, lock state, LDAP use, and two-factor authentication.</td></tr><tr><td>Email, profile, and IP filter</td><td>Sets the user email, sends account information, assigns a user profile, and optionally restricts web access by IP.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Outbound Calls

<figure id="bkmrk-outbound-calls-secti">![Outbound Calls section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ASkchan-sip-outbound-calls.png)<figcaption>Outbound Calls section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to control the caller ID, emergency caller ID, area-code handling, dialing filters, routing profile, and call rate used by outbound calls.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeexternal"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>External caller ID</td><td>Sets or hides the caller ID number and name sent on outbound calls.</td></tr><tr><td>SMS and override caller ID</td><td>Controls SMS caller ID and optional SIP header based caller ID overrides.</td></tr><tr><td>Emergency caller ID</td><td>Defines the emergency number identity and whether empty emergency caller ID warnings are ignored.</td></tr><tr><td>Area code and caller ID regex</td><td>Applies prefixes and caller ID rewrite rules before routing.</td></tr><tr><td>Do Not and Only Allow lists</td><td>Applies tenant call-list restrictions to this extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Routing profile and call rate</td><td>Selects the routing profile, SMS routing profile, and client rate used by calls.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Inbound Calls

<figure id="bkmrk-inbound-calls-sectio">![Inbound Calls section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/LaMchan-sip-inbound-calls.png)<figcaption>Inbound Calls section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for inbound caller ID privacy controls.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeblock-in"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Block inbound caller ID number</td><td>Prevents the caller ID number from being shown to this extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Block inbound caller ID name</td><td>Prevents the caller ID name from being shown to this extension.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Find me/Follow me Configuration

<figure id="bkmrk-find-me%2Ffollow-me-co-1">![Find me/Follow me Configuration section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/kLechan-sip-find-me-follow-me-configuration.png)<figcaption>Find me/Follow me Configuration section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to forward calls to an alternate number when find-me/follow-me is enabled.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposefmfm-num"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>FMFM number and status</td><td>Sets the external follow-me number and enables or disables the feature.</td></tr><tr><td>Condition and dial method</td><td>Limits follow-me behavior to a condition and selects how the alternate number is dialed.</td></tr><tr><td>Confirmation and messages</td><td>Requires answer confirmation and selects confirm/hold messages.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID and timing</td><td>Controls caller ID presentation, prefixes, delay, and dial timeout for the follow-me call.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Additional Destinations - Active if checked

<figure id="bkmrk-additional-destinati-1">![Additional Destinations - Active if checked section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/GnWchan-sip-additional-destinations-active-if-checked.png)<figcaption>Additional Destinations - Active if checked section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to define failover or conditional routing for calls that do not complete normally.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeuncondit"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Unconditional</td><td>Always routes calls to the selected destination when enabled.</td></tr><tr><td>On no answer, busy, or offline</td><td>Routes calls when the extension does not answer, is busy, or is offline.</td></tr><tr><td>On condition</td><td>Routes calls to a selected destination when the chosen condition matches.</td></tr><tr><td>Missed call notification</td><td>Sends email notifications for missed calls, with options to ignore internal or queue-originated calls.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Note

<figure id="bkmrk-note-section-for-cha">![Note section for chan_sip extension 100.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/PSichan-sip-note.png)<figcaption>Note section for chan\_sip extension 100.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for administrative classification and free-form notes, then save or delete the extension.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposebranch-a"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Branch and department</td><td>Classifies the extension for reporting and administration.</td></tr><tr><td>Reference ID and additional info</td><td>Stores external references and notes.</td></tr><tr><td>Save, delete, and back</td><td>Save applies changes, Delete removes the extension when allowed, and Back returns to the Extensions list.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Create and Edit PJSIP Extensions

Use this page to create or edit a phone extension that registers as a PJSIP endpoint. The form works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar.

The screenshots use the **Canistracci Oil** demo extension **101 Bella Stone**. Creating and editing use the same form: a new extension opens with tenant defaults, while an existing extension opens with saved values.

## Creating and editing

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescriptioncre"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Open Configuration &gt; Extensions and select New PJSIP peer. Fill the required fields and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open an existing extension from the Extensions list. Update the required fields and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>When delete permission is available, open the extension and select Delete. Confirm only after checking routing, phones, queues, and other references.</td></tr></tbody></table>

For PJSIP extensions, the endpoint username normally uses the extension number, a hyphen, and the tenant code, such as 101-CANISTRACCI. Press the swapped-arrow icon beside Username to switch the separator from a hyphen to an underscore, for example 101\_CANISTRACCI. If custom usernames are enabled in Admin &gt; Settings, you can enter a username that does not follow the generated tenant-code pattern.

## Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/3yqpjsip-information.png)<figcaption>Information section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for the extension identity, endpoint credentials, media basics, groups, voicemail message-waiting indication, DND state, and inbound ring timeout.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposenumber-a"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Number and name</td><td>Number is the internal extension number. Name is the display name used in lists, caller ID, and reports.</td></tr><tr><td>Description and emergency notes</td><td>Description is an administrator note. Emergency notes can be used by emergency routing and notification logic.</td></tr><tr><td>SIP stack</td><td>Shows whether the endpoint is using chan\_sip or PJSIP. Users with switch permission can change the stack from this form or from the Extensions list.</td></tr><tr><td>Username and password</td><td>Endpoint credentials used by the phone or softphone. The default username pattern is the extension number followed by the tenant code.</td></tr><tr><td>Codecs and DTMF</td><td>Controls the allowed audio/video codecs and DTMF signaling mode used by the endpoint.</td></tr><tr><td>Media and groups</td><td>Direct media, call groups, pickup groups, spy groups, and message-waiting options control how the endpoint participates in calls and monitoring.</td></tr><tr><td>Voicemail, DND, and timeout</td><td>Voicemail MWI, DND, and inbound dial timeout control how incoming calls are presented and how long the extension rings.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Trunk mode

<figure id="bkmrk-additional-trunk-mod">![Additional trunk mode options visible after enabling Trunk on a PJSIP extension.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/pjsip-trunk-mode-options.png)<figcaption>Additional trunk mode options visible after enabling Trunk on a PJSIP extension.</figcaption></figure>Enable **Trunk** only when the PJSIP endpoint is another PBX, gateway, or upstream device that should receive calls by dialed number rather than as a single telephone endpoint. A normal phone extension should usually leave this option disabled.

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optioneffec"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Effect</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Trunk</td><td>Changes how calls are sent to the endpoint. With trunk mode disabled, MiRTA PBX dials the PJSIP endpoint contacts as a phone endpoint. With trunk mode enabled, MiRTA PBX sends the called number to the endpoint, or the configured DID override when one is set.</td></tr><tr><td>DID Number</td><td>Automatic sends the original called number to the peer. Set to sends the value entered in the DID number field instead, which is useful when the downstream PBX or gateway expects a fixed pilot number or a rewritten DID.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID Number Override</td><td>Controls which outbound caller ID values are preserved from the SIP INVITE received from the trunk device. The default behavior can keep both caller ID name and number from the INVITE. The other choices keep only the number, keep only the name, or ignore the INVITE caller ID and use the caller ID configured on the extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Emergency CallerID Number Override</td><td>For emergency routes, Get Emergency CallerID from SIP Invite allows the emergency caller ID sent by the trunk device to pass through. Do not use Emergency CallerID from SIP Invite makes MiRTA PBX replace it with the extension emergency caller ID, or the tenant default emergency caller ID when the extension does not define one.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID Number Source</td><td>Selects where inbound trunk caller ID is read from when a specific source is required. Automatic keeps the caller ID parsed by Asterisk. The explicit choices read the From, P-Asserted-Identity, P-Preferred-Identity, or Remote-Party-ID header and use it to set caller ID before routing.</td></tr></tbody></table>

In the dialplan, PJSIP trunk mode affects both direct endpoint dialing and registered-contact dialing. When contacts are used, MiRTA PBX rewrites the PJSIP contact URI user part from the endpoint identity to the dialed number, or to the DID override. If the endpoint is registered on another node, MiRTA PBX sends the call through the configured inter-node SIP trunking module.

## NAT Control

<figure id="bkmrk-nat-control-section-">![NAT Control section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/itwpjsip-nat-control.png)<figcaption>NAT Control section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to control endpoint reachability and keepalive behavior for devices behind NAT or with changing network paths.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposenatdefin"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>NAT</td><td>Defines how MiRTA PBX treats NAT traversal for the endpoint.</td></tr><tr><td>Qualify and qualify frequency</td><td>Controls whether the PBX checks endpoint reachability and how often checks are sent.</td></tr><tr><td>Keep alive and RTP keep alive</td><td>Sends periodic traffic to keep network mappings open and detect unavailable devices.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Call Settings

<figure id="bkmrk-call-settings-sectio">![Call Settings section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ClHpjsip-call-settings.png)<figcaption>Call Settings section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for call behavior that is not specific to inbound or outbound routing.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposefax-and-"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Fax and volume</td><td>Controls T.38 fax behavior and transmit/receive volume adjustments.</td></tr><tr><td>Music on hold and language</td><td>Selects media behavior and the preferred language for prompts played to the extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Directories and phone books</td><td>Controls whether the extension appears in dial-by-name directories and phone book generated lists.</td></tr><tr><td>Call waiting and autoanswer</td><td>Controls second-call handling and optional automatic answer behavior for supported phones.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Inbound Recording

<figure id="bkmrk-inbound-recording-se">![Inbound Recording section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/yR3pjsip-inbound-recording.png)<figcaption>Inbound Recording section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for recording behavior applied to calls received by the extension.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeinbound-"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Inbound recording policy</td><td>Controls whether inbound calls are recorded and whether recording privacy behavior is enabled.</td></tr><tr><td>Recording notifications</td><td>When enabled, recordings can be mailed and processed according to tenant recording settings.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Outbound Recording

<figure id="bkmrk-outbound-recording-s">![Outbound Recording section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/PPlpjsip-outbound-recording.png)<figcaption>Outbound Recording section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for recording and post-processing behavior applied to calls placed by the extension.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposealways-r"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Always record</td><td>Controls whether outbound calls from this extension are recorded, unless tenant-wide settings force recording.</td></tr><tr><td>Email recording to</td><td>Sends matching recordings to the configured address. Minimum size can suppress very small recordings.</td></tr><tr><td>Transcript, summary, sentiment</td><td>Enables transcript, summary, and sentiment processing when the tenant supports those services.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Security

<figure id="bkmrk-security-section-for">![Security section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/IaIpjsip-security.png)<figcaption>Security section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to restrict registration, authentication, abuse behavior, cost limits, and outbound availability.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeauthenti"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Authentication and network filters</td><td>Controls endpoint trust, allowed IPs, and authentication-related behavior.</td></tr><tr><td>Abuse detection and cost limits</td><td>Locks or warns on suspicious or excessive usage according to tenant policy.</td></tr><tr><td>Outbound destinations</td><td>Allows all calls, blocks calls, or applies a destination regex filter.</td></tr><tr><td>Lock PIN and max duration</td><td>Allows the extension to be locked and caps outbound call duration.</td></tr><tr><td>Working hours</td><td>Restricts outbound calling to the selected weekday condition.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Web User Panel and Switchboard

<figure id="bkmrk-web-user-panel-and-s-1">![Web User Panel and Switchboard section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/RZFpjsip-web-user-panel-and-switchboard.png)<figcaption>Web User Panel and Switchboard section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to enable user-facing web access and related application permissions for the extension.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeaccess-t"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Access toggles</td><td>Enables the user panel, web phone, switchboard, and optional custom user application.</td></tr><tr><td>Web user and password</td><td>Sets the login identity and password. If no web user is specified, the endpoint username is used.</td></tr><tr><td>Password policy and 2FA</td><td>Controls expiry, forced change, lock state, LDAP use, and two-factor authentication.</td></tr><tr><td>Email, profile, and IP filter</td><td>Sets the user email, sends account information, assigns a user profile, and optionally restricts web access by IP.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Outbound Calls

<figure id="bkmrk-outbound-calls-secti">![Outbound Calls section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ukGpjsip-outbound-calls.png)<figcaption>Outbound Calls section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to control the caller ID, emergency caller ID, area-code handling, dialing filters, routing profile, and call rate used by outbound calls.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeexternal"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>External caller ID</td><td>Sets or hides the caller ID number and name sent on outbound calls.</td></tr><tr><td>SMS and override caller ID</td><td>Controls SMS caller ID and optional SIP header based caller ID overrides.</td></tr><tr><td>Emergency caller ID</td><td>Defines the emergency number identity and whether empty emergency caller ID warnings are ignored.</td></tr><tr><td>Area code and caller ID regex</td><td>Applies prefixes and caller ID rewrite rules before routing.</td></tr><tr><td>Do Not and Only Allow lists</td><td>Applies tenant call-list restrictions to this extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Routing profile and call rate</td><td>Selects the routing profile, SMS routing profile, and client rate used by calls.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Inbound Calls

<figure id="bkmrk-inbound-calls-sectio">![Inbound Calls section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/aiVpjsip-inbound-calls.png)<figcaption>Inbound Calls section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for inbound caller ID privacy controls.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeblock-in"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Block inbound caller ID number</td><td>Prevents the caller ID number from being shown to this extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Block inbound caller ID name</td><td>Prevents the caller ID name from being shown to this extension.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Find me/Follow me Configuration

<figure id="bkmrk-find-me%2Ffollow-me-co-1">![Find me/Follow me Configuration section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/BwKpjsip-find-me-follow-me-configuration.png)<figcaption>Find me/Follow me Configuration section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to forward calls to an alternate number when find-me/follow-me is enabled.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposefmfm-num"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>FMFM number and status</td><td>Sets the external follow-me number and enables or disables the feature.</td></tr><tr><td>Condition and dial method</td><td>Limits follow-me behavior to a condition and selects how the alternate number is dialed.</td></tr><tr><td>Confirmation and messages</td><td>Requires answer confirmation and selects confirm/hold messages.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID and timing</td><td>Controls caller ID presentation, prefixes, delay, and dial timeout for the follow-me call.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Additional Destinations - Active if checked

<figure id="bkmrk-additional-destinati-1">![Additional Destinations - Active if checked section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/7I3pjsip-additional-destinations-active-if-checked.png)<figcaption>Additional Destinations - Active if checked section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to define failover or conditional routing for calls that do not complete normally.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeuncondit"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Unconditional</td><td>Always routes calls to the selected destination when enabled.</td></tr><tr><td>On no answer, busy, or offline</td><td>Routes calls when the extension does not answer, is busy, or is offline.</td></tr><tr><td>On condition</td><td>Routes calls to a selected destination when the chosen condition matches.</td></tr><tr><td>Missed call notification</td><td>Sends email notifications for missed calls, with options to ignore internal or queue-originated calls.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Note

<figure id="bkmrk-note-section-for-pjs">![Note section for PJSIP extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/wzapjsip-note.png)<figcaption>Note section for PJSIP extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for administrative classification and free-form notes, then save or delete the extension.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposebranch-a"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Branch and department</td><td>Classifies the extension for reporting and administration.</td></tr><tr><td>Reference ID and additional info</td><td>Stores external references and notes.</td></tr><tr><td>Save, delete, and back</td><td>Save applies changes, Delete removes the extension when allowed, and Back returns to the Extensions list.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Edit PJSIP Endpoint

Use this page to tune the PJSIP endpoint behavior behind a PJSIP extension. The settings here control media negotiation, NAT behavior, DTLS certificate handling, and transport-related media addressing. The screenshots use the **Canistracci Oil** demo PJSIP extension **101 Bella Stone**.

## Opening and saving

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescriptionope"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Open</td><td>Open Configuration &gt; Extensions, edit a PJSIP extension, then choose the Endpoint detail link.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Update the required fields and select Save. The form returns to the PJSIP extension after saving.</td></tr><tr><td>Back</td><td>Use Back to return to the PJSIP extension without applying changes.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section for PJSIP endpoint for extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/endpoint-information.png)<figcaption>Information section for PJSIP endpoint for extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for media path behavior, contact rewriting, connected-line signaling, NAT behavior, T.38 behavior, packetization, RTCP multiplexing, and ring-in-use notifications.

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optionpurpo"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Direct Media</td><td>Determines whether media may flow directly between endpoints</td></tr><tr><td>Rewrite Contact</td><td>Allow Contact header to be rewritten with the source IP address-port</td></tr><tr><td>Connected Line Method</td><td>Connected line media type</td></tr><tr><td>DirectMedia Method</td><td>Direct Media method type</td></tr><tr><td>Direct Media Glare Mitigation</td><td>Mitigation of direct media re INVITE glare</td></tr><tr><td>Disable direct media on NAT</td><td>Disable direct media session refreshes when NAT obstructs the media session</td></tr><tr><td>Force rport</td><td>Force use of return port</td></tr><tr><td>Outbound Proxy</td><td>Proxy through which to send requests a full SIP URI must be provided</td></tr><tr><td>RTP Symmetric</td><td>Enforce that RTP must be symmetric</td></tr><tr><td>T.38 UDPTL NAT</td><td>Use the NATTED IP in the UDPTL for T.38</td></tr><tr><td>RPID Immediate</td><td>Immediately send connected line updates on unanswered incoming calls</td></tr><tr><td>Use ptime</td><td>Use Endpoint's requested packetization interval</td></tr><tr><td>RTCP Mux</td><td>Controls whether RTP and RTCP can be multiplexed on the same transport flow.</td></tr><tr><td>Notify Ringing when Ring in Use</td><td>When an extension is in Ring in Use state, notifies the ringing</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Security

<figure id="bkmrk-security-section-for">![Security section for PJSIP endpoint for extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/endpoint-security.png)<figcaption>Security section for PJSIP endpoint for extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for DTLS certificate settings used by secure media and WebRTC-style endpoint behavior.

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optionpurpo-1"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>DTLS certificate file path</td><td>Path to certificate file to present to peer</td></tr><tr><td>DTLS CA certificate file path</td><td>Path to certificate authority certificate</td></tr><tr><td>DTLS Auto generate certificate</td><td>Enable ephemeral DTLS certificate generation</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Transport

<figure id="bkmrk-transport-section-fo">![Transport section for PJSIP endpoint for extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/endpoint-transport.png)<figcaption>Transport section for PJSIP endpoint for extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for the external media address used in RTP handling.

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optionpurpo-2"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>External Media Address</td><td>External IP address to use in RTP handling</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Edit PJSIP AOR

Use this page to tune the PJSIP Address of Record for a PJSIP extension. These settings control registration contact limits, contact expiration timing, mailbox subscription hints, and Path support. The screenshots use the **Canistracci Oil** demo PJSIP extension **101 Bella Stone**.

## Opening and saving

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescriptionope"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Open</td><td>Open Configuration &gt; Extensions, edit a PJSIP extension, then choose the AOR detail link.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Update the required fields and select Save. The form returns to the PJSIP extension after saving.</td></tr><tr><td>Back</td><td>Use Back to return to the PJSIP extension without applying changes.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section for PJSIP AOR for extension 101.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/aor-information.png)<figcaption>Information section for PJSIP AOR for extension 101.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for contact expiration limits, mailbox subscriptions, maximum registered contacts, registration contact cleanup, and Path support.

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optionpurpo"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Default Expiration</td><td>Default expiration time in seconds for contacts that are dynamically bound to an AoR</td></tr><tr><td>Minimum Expiration</td><td>Minimum expiration time in seconds for contacts that are dynamically bound to an AoR</td></tr><tr><td>Maximum Expiration</td><td>Maximum expiration time in seconds for contacts that are dynamically bound to an AoR</td></tr><tr><td>Mailboxes</td><td>Allow subscriptions for the specified mailbox(es)</td></tr><tr><td>Max Contacts</td><td>Maximum number of contacts that can bind to an AoR</td></tr><tr><td>Remove Existing</td><td>On receiving a new registration to the AoR should it remove enough existing contacts not added or updated by the registration to satisfy Max Contacts? Any removed contacts will expire the soonest.</td></tr><tr><td>Remove Unavailable</td><td>On receiving a new registration to the AoR should it remove unavailable contacts not added or updated by the registration to satisfy Max Contacts?</td></tr><tr><td>Support Path</td><td>Enables Path support for REGISTER requests and Route support for other requests.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Create and Edit Custom Extensions

Use this page to create or edit an extension that routes to a custom dial target or external endpoint behavior. The form works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar.

The screenshots use the **Canistracci Oil** demo extension **106 Gia Parker**. Creating and editing use the same form: a new extension opens with tenant defaults, while an existing extension opens with saved values.

## Creating and editing

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescriptioncre"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Open Configuration &gt; Extensions and select Custom Extension. Fill the required fields and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open an existing extension from the Extensions list. Update the required fields and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>When delete permission is available, open the extension and select Delete. Confirm only after checking routing, phones, queues, and other references.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section for custom extension 106.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/JRKcustom-information.png)<figcaption>Information section for custom extension 106.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for the custom extension identity, call/pickup groups, DND state, and inbound timeout.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposenumber%2C-"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Number, name, and description</td><td>Defines the internal extension number, display name, and administrator description.</td></tr><tr><td>Call and pickup groups</td><td>Controls pickup behavior and group membership for incoming calls.</td></tr><tr><td>DND and inbound timeout</td><td>Controls whether the custom extension is marked DND and how long incoming calls are attempted.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Call Settings

<figure id="bkmrk-call-settings-sectio">![Call Settings section for custom extension 106.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/mC3custom-call-settings.png)<figcaption>Call Settings section for custom extension 106.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for media and listing behavior applied to the custom extension.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposefax-and-"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Fax and volume</td><td>Controls fax behavior and transmit/receive volume adjustments.</td></tr><tr><td>Music on hold and language</td><td>Selects hold media and prompt language.</td></tr><tr><td>Directories and phone books</td><td>Controls inclusion in dial-by-name and phone book generated lists.</td></tr><tr><td>Call waiting and autoanswer</td><td>Controls second-call handling and autoanswer behavior when supported by the target.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Outbound Recording

<figure id="bkmrk-outbound-recording-s">![Outbound Recording section for custom extension 106.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/DLkcustom-outbound-recording.png)<figcaption>Outbound Recording section for custom extension 106.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for outbound recording and optional recording processing.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposealways-r"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Always record and email recording</td><td>Controls outbound recording and optional delivery of recordings by email.</td></tr><tr><td>Transcript, summary, sentiment</td><td>Enables transcript, summary, and sentiment processing when available for the tenant.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Security

<figure id="bkmrk-security-section-for">![Security section for custom extension 106.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/p9dcustom-security.png)<figcaption>Security section for custom extension 106.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to define the custom dial target and restrict how the custom extension can be used.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeoutbound"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Outbound number</td><td>Defines the number or dial target used to reach the custom extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID and authentication</td><td>Controls caller ID use on internal calls and the authentication method expected for inbound matching.</td></tr><tr><td>Allowed providers and Teams ID</td><td>Restricts inbound providers and stores a Teams extension ID when Teams status integration is used.</td></tr><tr><td>Abuse, cost, and destination limits</td><td>Applies abuse detection, call cost limits, outbound destination filters, lock PIN, maximum duration, and working-hours restrictions.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Web User Panel

<figure id="bkmrk-web-user-panel-secti">![Web User Panel section for custom extension 106.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Uqfcustom-web-user-panel.png)<figcaption>Web User Panel section for custom extension 106.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to enable web access for the custom extension user.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeuser-pan"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>User panel toggle</td><td>Enables or disables web access for this extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Web user and password</td><td>Sets the login identity and password.</td></tr><tr><td>LDAP, 2FA, email, and profile</td><td>Controls external authentication, two-factor options, notification email, and user profile.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Outbound Calls

<figure id="bkmrk-outbound-calls-secti">![Outbound Calls section for custom extension 106.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Hwpcustom-outbound-calls.png)<figcaption>Outbound Calls section for custom extension 106.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to control outbound caller ID, emergency caller ID, prefixes, call lists, routing profile, and call rate.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeexternal"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>External caller ID</td><td>Sets caller ID number and name used by outbound calls.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID regex and emergency caller ID</td><td>Applies rewrite rules and emergency identity settings.</td></tr><tr><td>Area code and call lists</td><td>Applies area-code prefixes and Do Not or Only Allow list restrictions.</td></tr><tr><td>Routing profile and call rate</td><td>Selects the routing profile and call rate used by outbound calls.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Find me/Follow me Configuration

<figure id="bkmrk-find-me%2Ffollow-me-co-1">![Find me/Follow me Configuration section for custom extension 106.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Cmscustom-find-me-follow-me-configuration.png)<figcaption>Find me/Follow me Configuration section for custom extension 106.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to send calls to a follow-me destination under controlled conditions.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposefmfm-num"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>FMFM number and dial method</td><td>Sets the follow-me target and how it is dialed.</td></tr><tr><td>Confirmation and caller ID</td><td>Controls answer confirmation and caller ID behavior.</td></tr><tr><td>Delay and timeout</td><td>Controls how long to wait before and during follow-me dialing.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Additional Destinations - Active if checked

<figure id="bkmrk-additional-destinati-1">![Additional Destinations - Active if checked section for custom extension 106.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Xn7custom-additional-destinations-active-if-checked.png)<figcaption>Additional Destinations - Active if checked section for custom extension 106.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to route calls that are not answered, are busy, are offline, or meet a condition.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposefailover"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Failover destinations</td><td>Selects unconditional, no-answer, busy, offline, and conditional destinations.</td></tr><tr><td>Missed call notifications</td><td>Sends notifications and optionally ignores internal or queue-originated missed calls.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Note

<figure id="bkmrk-note-section-for-cus">![Note section for custom extension 106.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/a8Ccustom-note.png)<figcaption>Note section for custom extension 106.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for administrative metadata and final actions.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposebranch%2C-"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Branch, department, reference ID</td><td>Classifies the extension and stores external references.</td></tr><tr><td>Additional info</td><td>Stores free-form notes.</td></tr><tr><td>Save, delete, and back</td><td>Save applies changes, Delete removes the extension when allowed, and Back returns to the Extensions list.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Create and Edit Virtual Extensions

Use this page to create or edit a virtual extension that groups real extensions behind a single internal number. The form works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar.

The screenshots use the **Canistracci Oil** demo extension **108 Ivy Morgan**. Creating and editing use the same form: a new extension opens with tenant defaults, while an existing extension opens with saved values.

## Creating and editing

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescriptioncre"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Open Configuration &gt; Extensions and select Virtual Extension. Fill the required fields and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open an existing extension from the Extensions list. Update the required fields and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>When delete permission is available, open the extension and select Delete. Confirm only after checking routing, phones, queues, and other references.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section for virtual extension 108.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/3Kevirtual-information.png)<figcaption>Information section for virtual extension 108.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for the virtual extension identity, member extensions, security PIN, caller ID, groups, voicemail MWI, DND state, and inbound timeout.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposenumber%2C-"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Number, name, and description</td><td>Defines the internal virtual extension number, display name, and administrator description.</td></tr><tr><td>Security PIN</td><td>Requests a PIN when an extension tries to join the virtual extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Internal caller ID</td><td>Sets the caller ID shown for internal calls, or keeps it automatic.</td></tr><tr><td>Extensions</td><td>Selects the real extensions that belong to the virtual extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Groups, voicemail, DND, timeout</td><td>Controls call/pickup/spy groups, voicemail MWI, DND state, and inbound ring timeout.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Call Settings

<figure id="bkmrk-call-settings-sectio">![Call Settings section for virtual extension 108.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/apUvirtual-call-settings.png)<figcaption>Call Settings section for virtual extension 108.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for virtual extension call behavior and listing options.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposevolume-a"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Volume and music on hold</td><td>Adjusts audio levels and selects hold media.</td></tr><tr><td>Directories and phone books</td><td>Controls inclusion in dial-by-name and phone book generated lists.</td></tr><tr><td>Call waiting and parking lot</td><td>Controls server-side call waiting behavior and parking lot selection.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Outbound Recording

<figure id="bkmrk-outbound-recording-s">![Outbound Recording section for virtual extension 108.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Ptwvirtual-outbound-recording.png)<figcaption>Outbound Recording section for virtual extension 108.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for outbound recording and optional recording processing.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposealways-r"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Always record and email recording</td><td>Controls outbound recording and optional delivery of recordings by email.</td></tr><tr><td>Transcript, summary, sentiment</td><td>Enables transcript, summary, and sentiment processing when available for the tenant.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Security

<figure id="bkmrk-security-section-for">![Security section for virtual extension 108.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/iduvirtual-security.png)<figcaption>Security section for virtual extension 108.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to limit outbound usage from the virtual extension.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeoutbound"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Outbound destinations</td><td>Allows all calls, blocks calls, or applies a destination regex filter.</td></tr><tr><td>Lock PIN and max duration</td><td>Allows the virtual extension to be locked and caps outbound call duration.</td></tr><tr><td>Working hours</td><td>Restricts outbound calling to the selected weekday condition.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Web User Panel

<figure id="bkmrk-web-user-panel-secti">![Web User Panel section for virtual extension 108.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Umxvirtual-web-user-panel.png)<figcaption>Web User Panel section for virtual extension 108.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to enable web access for the virtual extension user.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeuser-pan"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>User panel toggle</td><td>Enables or disables web access for this extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Web user and password</td><td>Sets the login identity and password.</td></tr><tr><td>LDAP, 2FA, email, and profile</td><td>Controls external authentication, two-factor options, notification email, and user profile.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Outbound Calls

<figure id="bkmrk-outbound-calls-secti">![Outbound Calls section for virtual extension 108.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/rBTvirtual-outbound-calls.png)<figcaption>Outbound Calls section for virtual extension 108.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to control caller ID, area-code handling, dialing filters, and routing for calls placed from the virtual extension.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposeexternal"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>External caller ID</td><td>Sets caller ID number and name used by outbound calls.</td></tr><tr><td>Use this caller ID in a virtual extension</td><td>Controls whether member extensions use this caller ID when calls originate through the virtual extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID regex and area code</td><td>Applies rewrite rules and number prefixes before routing.</td></tr><tr><td>Call lists and routing profile</td><td>Applies Do Not or Only Allow lists and selects the routing profile.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Find me/Follow me Configuration

<figure id="bkmrk-find-me%2Ffollow-me-co-1">![Find me/Follow me Configuration section for virtual extension 108.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/kemvirtual-find-me-follow-me-configuration.png)<figcaption>Find me/Follow me Configuration section for virtual extension 108.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to send calls to a follow-me destination under controlled conditions.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposefmfm-num"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>FMFM number and condition</td><td>Sets the follow-me target and optional condition.</td></tr><tr><td>Dial method and confirmation</td><td>Controls how the follow-me call is dialed and whether answer confirmation is required.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID and timing</td><td>Controls caller ID presentation, delay, and timeout.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Additional Destinations - Active if checked

<figure id="bkmrk-additional-destinati-1">![Additional Destinations - Active if checked section for virtual extension 108.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/80Yvirtual-additional-destinations-active-if-checked.png)<figcaption>Additional Destinations - Active if checked section for virtual extension 108.</figcaption></figure>Use this section to route calls that do not complete normally or that meet a condition.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposefailover"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Failover destinations</td><td>Selects unconditional, no-answer, busy, offline, and conditional destinations.</td></tr><tr><td>Missed call notifications</td><td>Sends notifications and optionally ignores internal or queue-originated missed calls.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Note

<figure id="bkmrk-note-section-for-vir">![Note section for virtual extension 108.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/MCuvirtual-note.png)<figcaption>Note section for virtual extension 108.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for administrative metadata and final actions.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurposebranch%2C-"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Branch, department, reference ID</td><td>Classifies the extension and stores external references.</td></tr><tr><td>Additional info</td><td>Stores free-form notes.</td></tr><tr><td>Save, delete, and back</td><td>Save applies changes, Delete removes the extension when allowed, and Back returns to the Extensions list.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# DIDs

# Overview

The **DIDs** page manages inbound telephone numbers assigned to the selected tenant, including voice, fax, SMS, privacy, recording behavior, and routing destinations. Open it from **Configuration &gt; DIDs**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci Oil** tenant.

## Display modes

The DIDs page can be shown in DataTable mode or jqGrid mode. Use the display mode toggle in the toolbar to switch between them.

### DataTable mode

<figure id="bkmrk-dids-page-in-datatab">![DIDs page in DataTable display mode.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/vizdids-datatable.png)<figcaption>DIDs page in DataTable display mode.</figcaption></figure>DataTable mode shows the standard table with search, sorting, page-size selection, row checkboxes, and bulk actions.

### jqGrid mode

<figure id="bkmrk-dids-page-in-jqgrid-">![DIDs page in jqGrid display mode.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/7TEdids-jqgrid.png)<figcaption>DIDs page in jqGrid display mode.</figcaption></figure>jqGrid mode shows the same DID records in an advanced grid with column filters and grid toolbar actions.

## Working with DIDs

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New DID action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the DID from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the DID and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ou"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Outbound CallerID Regexs</td><td>Opens the DID caller ID rewrite rules used for outbound caller ID presentation.</td></tr><tr><td>Outbound DIDs</td><td>Opens the outbound DID management view.</td></tr><tr><td>New DID</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new DID.</td></tr><tr><td>Bulk DIDs</td><td>Opens the bulk DID creation tool.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr><tr><td>CSV/XLS Upload</td><td>Opens import tools for bulk DID data.</td></tr><tr><td>Enable jqGrid</td><td>Switches the table display mode for advanced grid controls.</td></tr><tr><td>Divert</td><td>Opens the divert action for selected DIDs when available.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-nu"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Number</td><td>The inbound number or matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Admin Comment</td><td>Internal administrator note for the DID.</td></tr><tr><td>Comment</td><td>Tenant-facing or operational note for the DID.</td></tr><tr><td>Max Channels</td><td>Maximum simultaneous channels allowed for the DID.</td></tr><tr><td>Recording</td><td>Recording policy shown for inbound calls on the DID.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID Prefix</td><td>Prefix applied to inbound caller ID number or name.</td></tr><tr><td>Unconditional forward</td><td>Destination used when unconditional forwarding is enabled.</td></tr><tr><td>Inbound Call Rates</td><td>Rate profile applied to inbound calls.</td></tr><tr><td>Action</td><td>Row-level actions available for the DID.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains documentation demo DID records such as **Docs Demo DID 1** and **Docs Demo DID 2**.

# Create and Edit DIDs

Use **Create and Edit DIDs** to add or maintain inbound numbers for the selected tenant. The same form is used for new DIDs and existing DIDs: a new DID starts with tenant defaults, while an existing DID opens with the saved values.

The screenshots use the **Canistracci Oil** tenant.

## Creating and editing

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-cr"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Open **Configuration &gt; DIDs** and select **New DID**. Fill the required fields and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open an existing DID from the DIDs list. Update the required fields and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>When delete permission is available, open the DID and select Delete, or delete selected rows from the list. Confirm only after checking destinations and call-flow references.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section on the DID edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Ve9dids-form-section-1.png)<figcaption>Information section on the DID edit form.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for the DID identity, channel limits, privacy behavior, emergency caller ID behavior, branch or department classification, inbound call rate, provider, and administrator notes.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurpose-numbers"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Number</td><td>Sets the DID number. Depending on system format settings, the number can be entered as country, area, and number fields or as a single value.</td></tr><tr><td>Comment and admin comment</td><td>Stores visible and internal notes for list views and administration.</td></tr><tr><td>Max Channels</td><td>Limits simultaneous use of the DID. Empty means unlimited; zero disables usage.</td></tr><tr><td>CNAM and privacy</td><td>Controls caller-name lookup and whether inbound caller ID is hidden.</td></tr><tr><td>Emergency caller ID</td><td>Marks the DID for emergency caller ID use and stores emergency notes when enabled.</td></tr><tr><td>Branch, department, rate, and provider</td><td>Classifies the DID and links it to inbound rating or DID provider data when those options are available.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Voice

<figure id="bkmrk-voice-section-on-the">![Voice section on the DID edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/KeYdids-form-section-2.png)<figcaption>Voice section on the DID edit form.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for voice-call forwarding, recording, caller ID prefixes, and the main inbound destination.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurpose-uncondi"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Unconditional Forward</td><td>Routes all inbound calls to the selected destination when enabled.</td></tr><tr><td>Recording</td><td>Controls whether inbound calls are recorded and whether callers or called parties can start or stop recording.</td></tr><tr><td>Email recording and minimum size</td><td>Sends matching recordings to configured recipients and suppresses very small recordings when a minimum size is set.</td></tr><tr><td>Transcript, summary, and sentiment</td><td>Enables AI processing for recorded calls when the tenant supports those services.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID prefixes</td><td>Adds prefixes to inbound caller ID number or name before the call is delivered.</td></tr><tr><td>Destination</td><td>Selects the normal inbound destination for calls to the DID.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Fax

<figure id="bkmrk-fax-section-on-the-d">![Fax section on the DID edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Ag7dids-form-section-3.png)<figcaption>Fax section on the DID edit form.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for inbound fax detection, fax routing, store-and-forward behavior, direct print or storage destinations, fax identity, and post-receive actions.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurpose-receive"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Receive Fax</td><td>Controls whether the DID never receives faxes, autodetects faxes, forces fax handling, stores and forwards, or sends faxes to print/storage.</td></tr><tr><td>Fax Routing Profile</td><td>Selects the routing profile used for outbound faxes when this DID is used as caller ID.</td></tr><tr><td>Forward or print/storage target</td><td>Sets the forwarding number or external print/storage target used by the selected fax mode.</td></tr><tr><td>Fax station and header</td><td>Sets the station ID and header text shown on fax documents.</td></tr><tr><td>Fax Protocol</td><td>Selects T.38, G.711, or mixed fax protocol behavior.</td></tr><tr><td>Email, store, and success destination</td><td>Controls fax delivery by email, whether received faxes are stored, and where the call continues after a successful fax.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## SMS

<figure id="bkmrk-sms-section-on-the-d">![SMS section on the DID edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/xuzdids-form-section-4.png)<figcaption>SMS section on the DID edit form.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for SMS reception protocol, message field mapping, message delivery, storage, and routing destination.

<table id="bkmrk-blockpurpose-protoco"><thead><tr><th>Block</th><th>Purpose</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Protocol</td><td>Selects whether the DID supports SMS and how inbound SMS data is received.</td></tr><tr><td>IMSI and field mapping</td><td>Maps inbound SMS source, destination, body, and MMS link fields for custom payloads.</td></tr><tr><td>Email and store</td><td>Controls notification delivery and whether messages are stored.</td></tr><tr><td>Destination</td><td>Selects the destination used when an inbound SMS is received.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Third party integration - Additional fields

<figure id="bkmrk-third-party-integrat-1">![Third party integration additional fields section on the DID edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/g8kdids-form-section-5.png)<figcaption>Third party integration additional fields section on the DID edit form.</figcaption></figure>Use this section for additional tenant-specific or integration-specific DID fields. The visible fields depend on the enabled integrations and custom template options.

# Media Files

# Overview

The **Media Files** page stores prompts and audio files used by IVRs, queues, DISAs, announcements, music-on-hold lists, and other call flows. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Media Files**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-media-files-list-pag">![Media Files list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/zx5media-files-list.png)<figcaption>Media Files list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-st"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Standard Message Media Files</td><td>Opens the standard prompt assignment page, where predefined system prompts can be associated with existing media files.</td></tr><tr><td>New Media File</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new media file. From that form you can upload an audio file, create a text-to-speech prompt, or record by dialing an extension or external number.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected media files after confirmation. Check IVRs, queues, DISAs, music-on-hold lists, and other call flows before deleting a prompt that may be in use.</td></tr><tr><td>Search</td><td>Filters the visible rows by name, format, size, checksum, date, or other displayed text.</td></tr><tr><td>Sort</td><td>Sorts the table by the selected column.</td></tr><tr><td>Page size</td><td>Changes how many media files are shown per page.</td></tr><tr><td>Audio download</td><td>Downloads the stored media file from the row's Audio column.</td></tr><tr><td>Audio playback</td><td>Opens the in-page media player when the stored format can be played directly by the browser.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-se"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Select</td><td>Selects one or more rows for bulk deletion.</td></tr><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used when selecting the prompt in IVRs, queues, destinations, and other configuration pages.</td></tr><tr><td>Format</td><td>Stored audio format, or the configured text-to-speech creation mode when no stored audio file exists yet.</td></tr><tr><td>Size</td><td>Stored media size. Dynamic text-to-speech prompts can show zero bytes because audio is generated during the call.</td></tr><tr><td>MD5</td><td>Checksum of the stored audio file. This is blank when the media file has no stored audio body.</td></tr><tr><td>Date</td><td>Last media-file creation or update timestamp.</td></tr><tr><td>Audio</td><td>Download and playback actions for the media file.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Common workflows

<table id="bkmrk-workflowuse-it-when-"><thead><tr><th>Workflow</th><th>Use it when</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Upload a Media File</td><td>You already have a WAV, MP3, M4A, or WMA file to use as a prompt.</td></tr><tr><td>Create a Media File with Text to Speech</td><td>You want MiRTA PBX to synthesize the prompt from text, either immediately or dynamically during the call.</td></tr><tr><td>Record by dialing out</td><td>You want MiRTA PBX to call an extension or external number and record the spoken audio from that call.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit an existing media file</td><td>Open the row by selecting its name, format, size, checksum, or date, then update the relevant form blocks and save.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The Canistracci OIL tenant contains these documentation examples: **Docs Demo IVR Upload Prompt**, **Docs Demo IVR Menu TTS**, **IVR selection**, and **Some music**.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a media file, check every call flow that can reference prompts: IVRs, queues, DISAs, hunt lists, custom destinations, music-on-hold lists, and standard messages. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Upload a Media File

Use **Upload a Media File** when you already have an audio prompt and want MiRTA PBX to store it for IVRs, queues, DISAs, announcements, or other call flows.

## Open the form

<table id="bkmrk-stepaction-1select-t"><thead><tr><th>Step</th><th>Action</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>1</td><td>Select the correct tenant in the top bar.</td></tr><tr><td>2</td><td>Open **Configuration &gt; Media Files**.</td></tr><tr><td>3</td><td>Select **New Media File**.</td></tr><tr><td>4</td><td>Complete the Information, upload, and transformation blocks, then select **Save**.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-block-wh">![Information block when creating an uploaded media file.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/2Zhupload-information.png)<figcaption>Information block when creating an uploaded media file.</figcaption></figure>This block identifies the prompt in lists and destination selectors.

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Short display name for the media file. Use a name that describes where the prompt is used, such as **Docs Demo IVR Upload Prompt**.</td></tr><tr><td>Description</td><td>Administrative note for the prompt. Use it to record the script purpose, call flow, or owner.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Upload Recording

<figure id="bkmrk-upload-recording-blo">![Upload recording block when creating an uploaded media file.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/cX6upload-recording.png)<figcaption>Upload recording block when creating an uploaded media file.</figcaption></figure>This block selects the local audio file to upload.

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-fil"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>File</td><td>Select the audio file to store. Use a clear filename, such as **ivr-selection-upload.wav**. MiRTA PBX can process common prompt formats including WAV, MP3, M4A, and WMA.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Upload/Create Transformations

<figure id="bkmrk-upload%2Fcreate-transf-1">![Upload/create transformations block for an uploaded media file.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/fOCupload-transformations.png)<figcaption>Upload/create transformations block for an uploaded media file.</figcaption></figure>This block controls audio normalization and format conversion when the media file is saved.

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Volume correction</td><td>Applies a linear gain adjustment. Use **1.0** for no change. Values below 1 reduce volume; values above 1 increase it.</td></tr><tr><td>Automatic</td><td>Lets MiRTA PBX choose the stored format based on the uploaded source.</td></tr><tr><td>WAV mono 8Khz 64kbps</td><td>Converts the prompt to an 8 kHz mono WAV format suitable for narrowband telephony prompts.</td></tr><tr><td>WAV mono 16Khz 128kbps</td><td>Converts the prompt to a 16 kHz mono WAV format.</td></tr><tr><td>SLN 8 khz format</td><td>Converts the prompt to 8 kHz signed linear audio.</td></tr><tr><td>SLN 16 khz format</td><td>Converts the prompt to 16 kHz signed linear audio.</td></tr><tr><td>Leave as is</td><td>Stores the uploaded file format without conversion, except for any requested volume correction.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Demo IVR Upload Prompt</td></tr><tr><td>Description</td><td>Uploaded prompt for the IVR selection menu</td></tr><tr><td>File</td><td>ivr-selection-upload.wav</td></tr><tr><td>Volume correction</td><td>1.0</td></tr><tr><td>Format conversion</td><td>Automatic</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Editing

To edit an uploaded media file, open it from the Media Files list, adjust the name or description, optionally upload a replacement file, review the transformation options, and select **Save**. If the prompt is already used in a call flow, test that flow after replacing the audio.

# Create a Media File with Text to Speech

Use **Create a Media File with Text to Speech** when you want MiRTA PBX to generate a prompt from written text instead of uploading a prerecorded audio file.

## Open the form

<table id="bkmrk-stepaction-1select-t"><thead><tr><th>Step</th><th>Action</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>1</td><td>Select the correct tenant in the top bar.</td></tr><tr><td>2</td><td>Open **Configuration &gt; Media Files**.</td></tr><tr><td>3</td><td>Select **New Media File**.</td></tr><tr><td>4</td><td>Complete the Information, text-to-speech, and transformation blocks, then select **Save**.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-block-wh">![Information block when creating a text-to-speech media file.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/tjKtts-information.png)<figcaption>Information block when creating a text-to-speech media file.</figcaption></figure>This block identifies the generated prompt in lists and destination selectors.

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Short display name for the generated prompt. The example uses **Docs Demo IVR Menu TTS**.</td></tr><tr><td>Description</td><td>Administrative note for the generated prompt. Use it to describe the IVR, queue, or call flow that will use the prompt.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Text to Speech

<figure id="bkmrk-text-to-speech-block">![Text-to-speech block with an IVR selection prompt example.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/fkftts-text-to-speech.png)<figcaption>Text-to-speech block with an IVR selection prompt example.</figcaption></figure>This block defines the script, voice engine, voice, and creation mode.

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Text</td><td>Prompt text to synthesize. The field supports runtime variables such as `${INCOMINGDID}` and `${CALLERID(num)}`. When the media file is generated dynamically during the call, any Asterisk channel variable or user-defined variable available in the call can be used in this format. Surround a number with `//` markers when it should be read digit by digit.</td></tr><tr><td>Engine</td><td>Voice engine to use. Leave **Tenant Default** unless this prompt needs a specific configured engine.</td></tr><tr><td>Voice</td><td>Voice to use for the generated prompt. Leave **Tenant Default** unless the prompt requires a specific language, dialect, or voice.</td></tr><tr><td>Create now</td><td>Generates and stores the audio when you save the media file. Use this for fixed prompts that do not need runtime variables.</td></tr><tr><td>Dynamically during the call</td><td>Stores the text and voice settings, then generates the prompt during call execution. Use this when the prompt includes Asterisk channel variables, user-defined variables, or other values that must be read from the active call.</td></tr><tr><td>Region</td><td>Appears for engines that require a regional endpoint, such as Amazon AWS Polly.</td></tr><tr><td>Voice Engine API username</td><td>Optional per-prompt API username when the selected engine requires credentials. Prefer tenant or global defaults when possible.</td></tr><tr><td>Voice Engine API password</td><td>Optional per-prompt API password. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example Text

For an IVR selection menu, use clear wording and keep the option list short:

```
Thank you for calling Canistracci OIL. For accounting, press 1. For sales, press 2. For support, press 3. To repeat this menu, press 9.
```

Dynamic prompts can include call variables, for example:

```
We received your call from ${CALLERID(num)} for ${INCOMINGDID}. Your support case is ${CASEID}.
```

## Upload/Create Transformations

<figure id="bkmrk-upload%2Fcreate-transf-1">![Upload/create transformations block for a text-to-speech media file.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/w3btts-transformations.png)<figcaption>Upload/create transformations block for a text-to-speech media file.</figcaption></figure>This block controls volume and format conversion for generated audio. It is especially relevant when using **Create now**, because the media file is synthesized and stored immediately.

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr-1"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Volume correction</td><td>Applies a linear gain adjustment. Use **1.0** for no change. Values below 1 reduce volume; values above 1 increase it.</td></tr><tr><td>Automatic</td><td>Lets MiRTA PBX choose the stored format.</td></tr><tr><td>WAV mono 8Khz 64kbps</td><td>Converts the generated audio to an 8 kHz mono WAV format suitable for narrowband telephony prompts.</td></tr><tr><td>WAV mono 16Khz 128kbps</td><td>Converts the generated audio to a 16 kHz mono WAV format.</td></tr><tr><td>SLN 8 khz format</td><td>Converts the generated audio to 8 kHz signed linear audio.</td></tr><tr><td>SLN 16 khz format</td><td>Converts the generated audio to 16 kHz signed linear audio.</td></tr><tr><td>Leave as is</td><td>Stores the generated file without conversion, except for any requested volume correction.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Editing

To edit a text-to-speech media file, open it from the Media Files list, update the text, engine, voice, creation mode, or transformation options, and select **Save**. If the prompt is used by an IVR, queue, or other call flow, test the call flow after saving.

# Conditions

# Overview

The **Conditions** page defines reusable tests for schedules, caller identity, channel usage, queue state, variables, authentication, and other routing decisions. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Conditions**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-conditions-list-page">![Conditions list page filtered to documentation examples in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/8A0conditions-list.png)<figcaption>Conditions list page filtered to documentation examples in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with conditions

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select New Condition, enter a name, choose the condition type, complete the type-specific fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open a condition by selecting its name in the list, change the fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Duplicate</td><td>Use the duplicate action in the Actions column to copy an existing condition before changing it.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more rows and use Delete Selected, or open a condition and delete it after checking references.</td></tr><tr><td>Show flow</td><td>Use the flow action in the Actions column to inspect where the condition routes calls.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Condition</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new condition.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes selected conditions after confirmation.</td></tr><tr><td>Search</td><td>Filters the visible rows by name, type, condition summary, or action text.</td></tr><tr><td>Sort</td><td>Sorts the list by the selected column.</td></tr><tr><td>Page size</td><td>Changes how many conditions are shown per page.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-se"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Select</td><td>Selects a condition for bulk deletion.</td></tr><tr><td>Name</td><td>Condition display name. Select it to edit the condition.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Condition type code used by MiRTA PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Condition</td><td>Human-readable summary of the configured match rule.</td></tr><tr><td>Actions</td><td>Duplicate and flow-inspection actions for the row.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Condition types

<table id="bkmrk-typepurposeexample-r"><thead><tr><th>Type</th><th>Purpose</th><th>Example record</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Weektime</td><td>Matches weekly recurring time slots, such as business hours or after-hours periods.</td><td>Docs Condition - Weektime</td></tr><tr><td>Calendar</td><td>Matches absolute date and time ranges for holidays, maintenance windows, and one-off closures.</td><td>Docs Condition - Calendar</td></tr><tr><td>Hours</td><td>Matches one or more daily time ranges without selecting specific weekdays.</td><td>Docs Condition - Hours</td></tr><tr><td>Simple Caller ID</td><td>Matches the caller number against one or more literal values or regular expressions.</td><td>Docs Condition - Simple Caller ID</td></tr><tr><td>Simple Caller ID Name</td><td>Matches the caller name against one or more literal values or regular expressions.</td><td>Docs Condition - Simple Caller ID Name</td></tr><tr><td>Weekday</td><td>Matches selected days of the week.</td><td>Docs Condition - Weekday</td></tr><tr><td>Date - exact match</td><td>Matches one or more exact dates or date/time values.</td><td>Docs Condition - Date - exact match</td></tr><tr><td>Date - lesser than date</td><td>Matches when the current date/time is earlier than the configured date/time.</td><td>Docs Condition - Date - lesser than date</td></tr><tr><td>Date - greater than date</td><td>Matches when the current date/time is later than the configured date/time.</td><td>Docs Condition - Date - greater than date</td></tr><tr><td>Date - between dates</td><td>Matches when the current date/time is between a configured start and end value.</td><td>Docs Condition - Date - between dates</td></tr><tr><td>Day of the month</td><td>Matches a specific day number in the month.</td><td>Docs Condition - Day of the month</td></tr><tr><td>Extension status</td><td>Matches the state of one selected extension or numbered flow.</td><td>Docs Condition - Extension status</td></tr><tr><td>Variable value</td><td>Matches a tenant user variable value.</td><td>Docs Condition - Variable value</td></tr><tr><td>Multiple variable values</td><td>Matches one variable against multiple possible values, each with its own destination path.</td><td>Docs Condition - Multiple variable values</td></tr><tr><td>System variable value</td><td>Matches an Asterisk or system channel variable value.</td><td>Docs Condition - System variable value</td></tr><tr><td>Multiple extensions status</td><td>Checks the combined state of multiple selected extensions.</td><td>Docs Condition - Multiple extensions status</td></tr><tr><td>AGI Script</td><td>Runs an AGI script and compares the AGIRESULT variable with TRUE.</td><td>Docs Condition - AGI Script</td></tr><tr><td>Authenticate</td><td>Prompts the caller for a PIN and matches when authentication succeeds.</td><td>Docs Condition - Authenticate</td></tr><tr><td>Tenant - number of I/O channels (external)</td><td>Matches when the tenant has more than the configured number of external channels in use.</td><td>Docs Condition - Tenant - number of I/O channels (external)</td></tr><tr><td>Tenant - number of any channels (internal and external)</td><td>Matches when the tenant has more than the configured number of total channels in use.</td><td>Docs Condition - Tenant - number of any channels (internal and external)</td></tr><tr><td>DID - number of inbound channels</td><td>Matches when a selected DID has more than the configured number of inbound channels in use.</td><td>Docs Condition - DID - number of inbound channels</td></tr><tr><td>Number of custom group channels</td><td>Matches when a custom channel group has more than the configured number of active channels.</td><td>Docs Condition - Number of custom group channels</td></tr><tr><td>Answering Machine Detection</td><td>Runs answering machine detection and matches according to the analysis result.</td><td>Docs Condition - Answering Machine Detection</td></tr><tr><td>SIP Header</td><td>Matches a SIP header against a regular expression.</td><td>Docs Condition - SIP Header</td></tr><tr><td>Agent logged in a queue</td><td>Matches when the selected agent is logged in to the selected queue.</td><td>Docs Condition - Agent logged in a queue</td></tr><tr><td>Agent paused from queue</td><td>Matches when the selected agent is paused in the selected queue.</td><td>Docs Condition - Agent paused from queue</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID in Phonebook</td><td>Matches when caller ID is found in a selected phone book.</td><td>Docs Condition - Caller ID in Phonebook</td></tr><tr><td>Feature code parameter</td><td>Matches parameters collected by a feature code.</td><td>Docs Condition - Feature code parameter</td></tr><tr><td>All conditions listed satisfied</td><td>Matches only when every selected condition is satisfied.</td><td>Docs Condition - All conditions listed satisfied</td></tr><tr><td>Any conditions listed satisfied</td><td>Matches when at least one selected condition is satisfied.</td><td>Docs Condition - Any conditions listed satisfied</td></tr><tr><td>Negate condition result</td><td>Matches when the selected condition does not match.</td><td>Docs Condition - Negate condition result</td></tr><tr><td>Use a Global Condition</td><td>References a global condition from the tenant configuration.</td><td>Docs Condition - Use a Global Condition</td></tr><tr><td>Check SMS message</td><td>Matches SMS message content.</td><td>Docs Condition - Check SMS message</td></tr><tr><td>Check if a specific channel is running</td><td>Checks whether a channel matching the configured attributes is currently running.</td><td>Docs Condition - Check if a specific channel is running</td></tr><tr><td>Multiple destination over weektime</td><td>Routes to different destinations based on a color-coded weekly timetable.</td><td>Docs Condition - Multiple destination over weektime</td></tr><tr><td>Call Screening using a random PIN</td><td>Screens a call by playing a prompt and asking the caller to enter a generated PIN.</td><td>Docs Condition - Call Screening using a random PIN</td></tr><tr><td>Caller has already called in</td><td>Checks recent inbound call history for the current caller.</td><td>Docs Condition - Caller has already called in</td></tr><tr><td>Caller has been called out</td><td>Checks recent outbound call history for the current caller.</td><td>Docs Condition - Caller has been called out</td></tr><tr><td>Queue Callers, more than</td><td>Matches when a selected queue has more than the configured number of callers waiting.</td><td>Docs Condition - Queue Callers, more than</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The Canistracci OIL tenant contains one documentation example for each available condition type: 39 records with names beginning with **Docs Condition -**. A global example named **Docs Global Condition - Weektime** is also available for the Use a Global Condition type.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a condition, check call flows, destinations, schedules, IVRs, feature codes, and reports that may reference it. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Weektime

The **Weektime** type matches weekly recurring time slots, such as business hours or after-hours periods.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Weektime** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-weektime-condition-e">![Weektime condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/xgQweektime.png)<figcaption>Weektime condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Weektime.</td></tr><tr><td>Timezone</td><td>Timezone used to evaluate the weekly schedule. Leave it empty to use the tenant default.</td></tr><tr><td>Select timeslots</td><td>Weekly calendar where matching time blocks are drawn.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Weektime</td></tr><tr><td>Timeslot</td><td>Monday 09:00-17:00</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Weektime** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Calendar

The **Calendar** type matches absolute date and time ranges for holidays, maintenance windows, and one-off closures.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Calendar** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-calendar-condition-e">![Calendar condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/QSMcalendar.png)<figcaption>Calendar condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Calendar.</td></tr><tr><td>Timezone</td><td>Timezone used to evaluate the calendar entries.</td></tr><tr><td>Select timeslots</td><td>Calendar where date and time blocks are entered.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Calendar</td></tr><tr><td>Calendar slot</td><td>2026-12-24 09:00 to 2026-12-24 17:00</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Calendar** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Hours

The **Hours** type matches one or more daily time ranges without selecting specific weekdays.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Hours** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-hours-condition-edit">![Hours condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/VN1hours.png)<figcaption>Hours condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Hours.</td></tr><tr><td>Timezone</td><td>Timezone used to evaluate the time ranges.</td></tr><tr><td>From - To</td><td>Up to three daily start and end ranges.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Hours</td></tr><tr><td>From - To</td><td>09:00 to 17:00</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Hours** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Simple Caller ID

The **Simple Caller ID** type matches the caller number against one or more literal values or regular expressions.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Simple Caller ID** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-simple-caller-id-con">![Simple Caller ID condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/lvqsimple-caller-id.png)<figcaption>Simple Caller ID condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Simple Caller ID.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID</td><td>Caller number value or regular expression to match. Multiple rows can be used.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Simple Caller ID</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID</td><td>^1555</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Simple Caller ID** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Simple Caller ID Name

The **Simple Caller ID Name** type matches the caller name against one or more literal values or regular expressions.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Simple Caller ID Name** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-simple-caller-id-nam">![Simple Caller ID Name condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/jYvsimple-caller-id-name.png)<figcaption>Simple Caller ID Name condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Simple Caller ID Name.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID Name</td><td>Caller name value or regular expression to match. Multiple rows can be used.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Simple Caller ID Name</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID Name</td><td>Canistracci</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Simple Caller ID Name** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Weekday

The **Weekday** type matches selected days of the week.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Weekday** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-weekday-condition-ed">![Weekday condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Lrfweekday.png)<figcaption>Weekday condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Weekday.</td></tr><tr><td>Timezone</td><td>Timezone used to determine the current weekday.</td></tr><tr><td>Sunday through Saturday</td><td>Checkboxes for the days that should match.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Weekday</td></tr><tr><td>Days</td><td>Monday through Friday</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Weekday** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Date - exact match

The **Date - exact match** type matches one or more exact dates or date/time values.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Date - exact match** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-date---exact-match-c">![Date - exact match condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/prNdate-exact-match.png)<figcaption>Date - exact match condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Date - exact match.</td></tr><tr><td>Timezone</td><td>Timezone used to evaluate the date.</td></tr><tr><td>Date</td><td>Exact date or date/time value to match.</td></tr><tr><td>Recurring</td><td>Treats the date as recurring instead of a one-time date.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Date - Exact Match</td></tr><tr><td>Date</td><td>2026-12-25 00:00:00</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Date - exact match** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Date - lesser than date

The **Date - lesser than date** type matches when the current date/time is earlier than the configured date/time.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Date - lesser than date** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-date---lesser-than-d">![Date - lesser than date condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/5JWdate-lesser-than-date.png)<figcaption>Date - lesser than date condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Date - lesser than date.</td></tr><tr><td>Lesser than Date</td><td>Date or date/time threshold used by the comparison.</td></tr><tr><td>Recurring</td><td>Treats the threshold as a recurring date value.</td></tr><tr><td>Custom</td><td>Uses a custom date expression instead of the date picker value.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Date - Lesser Than Date</td></tr><tr><td>Lesser than Date</td><td>2026-12-31 23:59:59</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Date - lesser than date** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Date - greater than date

The **Date - greater than date** type matches when the current date/time is later than the configured date/time.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Date - greater than date** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-date---greater-than-">![Date - greater than date condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ujUdate-greater-than-date.png)<figcaption>Date - greater than date condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Date - greater than date.</td></tr><tr><td>Greater than Date</td><td>Date or date/time threshold used by the comparison.</td></tr><tr><td>Recurring</td><td>Treats the threshold as a recurring date value.</td></tr><tr><td>Custom</td><td>Uses a custom date expression instead of the date picker value.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Date - Greater Than Date</td></tr><tr><td>Greater than Date</td><td>2026-01-01 00:00:00</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Date - greater than date** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Date - between dates

The **Date - between dates** type matches when the current date/time is between a configured start and end value.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Date - between dates** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-date---between-dates">![Date - between dates condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/4DSdate-between-dates.png)<figcaption>Date - between dates condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Date - between dates.</td></tr><tr><td>Between Date/Time</td><td>Start and end values for a matching window. Multiple windows can be configured.</td></tr><tr><td>Recurring</td><td>Treats the date window as recurring.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Date - Between Dates</td></tr><tr><td>Between Date/Time</td><td>2026-12-24 09:00:00 and 2026-12-24 17:00:00</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Date - between dates** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Day of the month

The **Day of the month** type matches a specific day number in the month.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Day of the month** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-day-of-the-month-con">![Day of the month condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/4Hwday-of-the-month.png)<figcaption>Day of the month condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Day of the month.</td></tr><tr><td>Timezone</td><td>Timezone used to evaluate the month day.</td></tr><tr><td>Day of the month</td><td>Day number from 1 to 31.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Day of the Month</td></tr><tr><td>Day of the month</td><td>15</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Day of the month** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Extension status

The **Extension status** type matches the state of one selected extension or numbered flow.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Extension status** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-extension-status-con">![Extension status condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/BAkextension-status.png)<figcaption>Extension status condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Extension status.</td></tr><tr><td>Extension</td><td>Extension or flow whose state is checked.</td></tr><tr><td>State</td><td>State to match: in use, not in use, or DND active.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Extension Status</td></tr><tr><td>Extension</td><td>100 - Alex Reed</td></tr><tr><td>State</td><td>Not in use</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Extension status** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Variable value

The **Variable value** type matches a tenant user variable value.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Variable value** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-variable-value-condi">![Variable value condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/7VAvariable-value.png)<figcaption>Variable value condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Variable value.</td></tr><tr><td>Variable</td><td>User variable name. The form prefixes the value with USR-.</td></tr><tr><td>Value</td><td>Value to compare against.</td></tr><tr><td>Use as Regex</td><td>Treats the value as a regular expression.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Variable Value</td></tr><tr><td>Variable</td><td>DEPARTMENT</td></tr><tr><td>Value</td><td>Accounting</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Variable value** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Multiple variable values

The **Multiple variable values** type matches one variable against multiple possible values, each with its own destination path.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Multiple variable values** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-multiple-variable-va">![Multiple variable values condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/P2Dmultiple-variable-values.png)<figcaption>Multiple variable values condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Multiple variable values.</td></tr><tr><td>Variable</td><td>User variable name. The form prefixes the value with USR-.</td></tr><tr><td>Value rows</td><td>Values to compare against.</td></tr><tr><td>Destination rows</td><td>Destination selected for each matching value.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Multiple Variable Values</td></tr><tr><td>Variable</td><td>SERVICE</td></tr><tr><td>Values</td><td>billing, support</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

This type hides the standard single match destination and shows destination rows for each configured variable value.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Multiple variable values** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# System variable value

The **System variable value** type matches an Asterisk or system channel variable value.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **System variable value** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-system-variable-valu">![System variable value condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/96Isystem-variable-value.png)<figcaption>System variable value condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select System variable value.</td></tr><tr><td>System variable</td><td>Variable name available in the call, such as CALLERID(num).</td></tr><tr><td>Value</td><td>Value to compare against.</td></tr><tr><td>Use as Regex</td><td>Treats the value as a regular expression.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - System Variable Value</td></tr><tr><td>System variable</td><td>CALLERID(num)</td></tr><tr><td>Value</td><td>^1555</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - System variable value** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Multiple extensions status

The **Multiple extensions status** type checks the combined state of multiple selected extensions.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Multiple extensions status** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-multiple-extensions-">![Multiple extensions status condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/bebmultiple-extensions-status.png)<figcaption>Multiple extensions status condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Multiple extensions status.</td></tr><tr><td>Extensions</td><td>Extensions or numbered flows included in the check.</td></tr><tr><td>State</td><td>Combined state rule that must match.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Multiple Extensions Status</td></tr><tr><td>Extensions</td><td>100 and 101</td></tr><tr><td>State</td><td>All users are online</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Multiple extensions status** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# AGI Script

The **AGI Script** type runs an AGI script and compares the AGIRESULT variable with TRUE.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **AGI Script** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-agi-script-condition">![AGI Script condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/wv6agi-script.png)<figcaption>AGI Script condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select AGI Script.</td></tr><tr><td>AGI Script</td><td>Script to execute.</td></tr><tr><td>Parameter 1-5</td><td>Optional script parameters, depending on the selected script definition.</td></tr><tr><td>AGIRESULT</td><td>The script result variable must evaluate to TRUE for the condition to match.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - AGI Script</td></tr><tr><td>AGI Script</td><td>Docs Demo AGI 1</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - AGI Script** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Authenticate

The **Authenticate** type prompts the caller for a PIN and matches when authentication succeeds.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Authenticate** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-authenticate-conditi">![Authenticate condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/K4pauthenticate.png)<figcaption>Authenticate condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Authenticate.</td></tr><tr><td>Welcome Message</td><td>Prompt played before PIN entry.</td></tr><tr><td>PIN</td><td>Valid PIN value. Additional PIN fields can define more accepted values.</td></tr><tr><td>Maximum digits</td><td>Maximum number of digits the caller can enter.</td></tr><tr><td>Wrong PIN Message</td><td>Prompt played after an invalid PIN.</td></tr><tr><td>Max attempts</td><td>How many failed attempts are allowed.</td></tr><tr><td>Timeout</td><td>How long to wait for digits.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Authenticate</td></tr><tr><td>PIN</td><td>1234</td></tr><tr><td>Max attempts</td><td>3</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Authenticate** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Tenant - number of I/O channels (external)

The **Tenant - number of I/O channels (external)** type matches when the tenant has more than the configured number of external channels in use.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Tenant - number of I/O channels (external)** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-tenant---number-of-i">![Tenant - number of I/O channels (external) condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/JPltenant-number-of-io-channels-external.png)<figcaption>Tenant - number of I/O channels (external) condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Tenant - number of I/O channels (external).</td></tr><tr><td>More than # of I/O channels used</td><td>External channel threshold.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Tenant Channels</td></tr><tr><td>More than</td><td>5</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Tenant - number of I/O channels (external)** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Tenant - number of any channels (internal and external)

The **Tenant - number of any channels (internal and external)** type matches when the tenant has more than the configured number of total channels in use.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Tenant - number of any channels (internal and external)** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-tenant---number-of-a">![Tenant - number of any channels (internal and external) condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/PmOtenant-number-of-any-channels.png)<figcaption>Tenant - number of any channels (internal and external) condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Tenant - number of any channels (internal and external).</td></tr><tr><td>More than # of any type of channels used</td><td>Total channel threshold, including internal and external channels.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Tenant Any Channels</td></tr><tr><td>More than</td><td>10</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Tenant - number of any channels (internal and external)** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# DID - number of inbound channels

The **DID - number of inbound channels** type matches when a selected DID has more than the configured number of inbound channels in use.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **DID - number of inbound channels** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-did---number-of-inbo">![DID - number of inbound channels condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/YC0did-number-of-inbound-channels.png)<figcaption>DID - number of inbound channels condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select DID - number of inbound channels.</td></tr><tr><td>DID to monitor</td><td>DID whose inbound channel usage is checked.</td></tr><tr><td>More than # of channels used</td><td>Inbound channel threshold.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - DID Channels</td></tr><tr><td>DID</td><td>Docs Demo DID 1</td></tr><tr><td>More than</td><td>1</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - DID - number of inbound channels** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Number of custom group channels

The **Number of custom group channels** type matches when a custom channel group has more than the configured number of active channels.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Number of custom group channels** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-number-of-custom-gro">![Number of custom group channels condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/xgMnumber-of-custom-group-channels.png)<figcaption>Number of custom group channels condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Number of custom group channels.</td></tr><tr><td>Group name</td><td>Custom group name to count.</td></tr><tr><td>More than # of channels used</td><td>Channel count threshold.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Channel Group Count</td></tr><tr><td>Group name</td><td>support</td></tr><tr><td>More than</td><td>2</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Number of custom group channels** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Answering Machine Detection

The **Answering Machine Detection** type runs answering machine detection and matches according to the analysis result.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Answering Machine Detection** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-answering-machine-de">![Answering Machine Detection condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/t6oanswering-machine-detection.png)<figcaption>Answering Machine Detection condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Answering Machine Detection.</td></tr><tr><td>Initial silence</td><td>Maximum initial silence before greeting detection.</td></tr><tr><td>Greeting</td><td>Maximum greeting duration.</td></tr><tr><td>After greeting, silence</td><td>Silence duration after greeting.</td></tr><tr><td>Total analysis time</td><td>Maximum analysis window.</td></tr><tr><td>Word settings</td><td>Minimum and maximum word lengths, silence between words, and maximum word count.</td></tr><tr><td>Silence threshold</td><td>Audio threshold used for silence detection.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Answering Machine Detection</td></tr><tr><td>Total analysis time</td><td>5000</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Answering Machine Detection** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# SIP Header

The **SIP Header** type matches a SIP header against a regular expression.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **SIP Header** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-sip-header-condition">![SIP Header condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/pW3sip-header.png)<figcaption>SIP Header condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select SIP Header.</td></tr><tr><td>SIP Header</td><td>Header name to inspect.</td></tr><tr><td>Regular Expression</td><td>Expression used to match the header value.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - SIP Header</td></tr><tr><td>SIP Header</td><td>X-Account</td></tr><tr><td>Regular Expression</td><td>Accounting</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - SIP Header** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Agent logged in a queue

The **Agent logged in a queue** type matches when the selected agent is logged in to the selected queue.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Agent logged in a queue** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-agent-logged-in-a-qu">![Agent logged in a queue condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/0Q4agent-logged-in-a-queue.png)<figcaption>Agent logged in a queue condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Agent logged in a queue.</td></tr><tr><td>Agent</td><td>Agent extension or external agent to check.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue</td><td>Queue where login state is checked.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Agent Logged In</td></tr><tr><td>Agent</td><td>100 - Alex Reed</td></tr><tr><td>Queue</td><td>Accounting</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Agent logged in a queue** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Agent paused from queue

The **Agent paused from queue** type matches when the selected agent is paused in the selected queue.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Agent paused from queue** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-agent-paused-from-qu">![Agent paused from queue condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/PTOagent-paused-from-queue.png)<figcaption>Agent paused from queue condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Agent paused from queue.</td></tr><tr><td>Agent</td><td>Agent extension or external agent to check.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue</td><td>Queue where pause state is checked.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Agent Paused</td></tr><tr><td>Agent</td><td>100 - Alex Reed</td></tr><tr><td>Queue</td><td>Accounting</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Agent paused from queue** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Caller ID in Phonebook

The **Caller ID in Phonebook** type matches when caller ID is found in a selected phone book.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Caller ID in Phonebook** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-caller-id-in-phonebo">![Caller ID in Phonebook condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/BZzcaller-id-in-phonebook.png)<figcaption>Caller ID in Phonebook condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Caller ID in Phonebook.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID</td><td>Caller number to look up, usually provided dynamically during a call.</td></tr><tr><td>Phonebook</td><td>Phone book used for the lookup.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Caller ID in Phonebook</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID</td><td>${CALLERID(num)}</td></tr><tr><td>Phonebook</td><td>Default</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Caller ID in Phonebook** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Feature code parameter

The **Feature code parameter** type matches parameters collected by a feature code.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Feature code parameter** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-feature-code-paramet">![Feature code parameter condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Yvbfeature-code-parameter.png)<figcaption>Feature code parameter condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Feature code parameter.</td></tr><tr><td>Parameter</td><td>Parameter value to compare. Multiple parameter rows can be used.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Feature Code Parameter</td></tr><tr><td>Parameter 1</td><td>42</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Feature code parameter** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# All conditions listed satisfied

The **All conditions listed satisfied** type matches only when every selected condition is satisfied.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **All conditions listed satisfied** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-all-conditions-liste">![All conditions listed satisfied condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/all-conditions-listed-satisfied.png)<figcaption>All conditions listed satisfied condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select All conditions listed satisfied.</td></tr><tr><td>Conditions</td><td>Conditions that must all match.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - All Conditions</td></tr><tr><td>Conditions</td><td>Weektime and Weekday</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - All conditions listed satisfied** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Any conditions listed satisfied

The **Any conditions listed satisfied** type matches when at least one selected condition is satisfied.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Any conditions listed satisfied** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-any-conditions-liste">![Any conditions listed satisfied condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/any-conditions-listed-satisfied.png)<figcaption>Any conditions listed satisfied condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Any conditions listed satisfied.</td></tr><tr><td>Conditions</td><td>Conditions where any one match is enough.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Any Conditions</td></tr><tr><td>Conditions</td><td>Weektime or Caller ID</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Any conditions listed satisfied** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Negate condition result

The **Negate condition result** type matches when the selected condition does not match.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Negate condition result** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-negate-condition-res">![Negate condition result condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/negate-condition-result.png)<figcaption>Negate condition result condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Negate condition result.</td></tr><tr><td>Condition</td><td>Condition whose result is inverted.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Negate Condition</td></tr><tr><td>Condition</td><td>Docs Condition - Weektime</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Negate condition result** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Use a Global Condition

The **Use a Global Condition** type references a global condition from the tenant configuration.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Use a Global Condition** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-use-a-global-conditi">![Use a Global Condition condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/use-a-global-condition.png)<figcaption>Use a Global Condition condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Use a Global Condition.</td></tr><tr><td>Condition</td><td>Global condition to evaluate from this tenant.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Use Global Condition</td></tr><tr><td>Global condition</td><td>Docs Global Condition - Weektime</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

The global condition supplies the test. The tenant condition still defines the destinations that should run when the global test matches or does not match.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Use a Global Condition** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Check SMS message

The **Check SMS message** type matches SMS message content.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Check SMS message** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-check-sms-message-co">![Check SMS message condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/check-sms-message.png)<figcaption>Check SMS message condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Check SMS message.</td></tr><tr><td>Message content</td><td>Text or expression used to match the SMS body.</td></tr><tr><td>Case sensitive</td><td>Requires exact case matching.</td></tr><tr><td>Exact Match</td><td>Compares exact content without filtering characters.</td></tr><tr><td>Use regex</td><td>Treats message content as a regular expression.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Check SMS Message</td></tr><tr><td>Message content</td><td>STOP</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Check SMS message** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Check if a specific channel is running

The **Check if a specific channel is running** type checks whether a channel matching the configured attributes is currently running.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Check if a specific channel is running** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-check-if-a-specific-">![Check if a specific channel is running condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/check-if-a-specific-channel-is-running.png)<figcaption>Check if a specific channel is running condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Check if a specific channel is running.</td></tr><tr><td>Channel</td><td>Channel name or pattern.</td></tr><tr><td>Context</td><td>Dialplan context to match.</td></tr><tr><td>Extension</td><td>Dialplan extension to match.</td></tr><tr><td>State</td><td>Channel state to match.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID</td><td>Caller ID value to match.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Check Channel</td></tr><tr><td>Channel</td><td>PJSIP/100</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Check if a specific channel is running** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Multiple destination over weektime

The **Multiple destination over weektime** type routes to different destinations based on a color-coded weekly timetable.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Multiple destination over weektime** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-multiple-destination">![Multiple destination over weektime condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/multiple-destination-over-weektime.png)<figcaption>Multiple destination over weektime condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Multiple destination over weektime.</td></tr><tr><td>Color names</td><td>Labels for each timetable color.</td></tr><tr><td>Timetable</td><td>Weekly grid where time blocks are assigned to colors.</td></tr><tr><td>Destinations</td><td>Destination selected for each color.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Multiple Destination over Weektime</td></tr><tr><td>Color 1</td><td>Open hours</td></tr><tr><td>Color 2</td><td>After hours</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

This type uses one destination group for each color in the weekly timetable.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Multiple destination over weektime** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Call Screening using a random PIN

The **Call Screening using a random PIN** type screens a call by playing a prompt and asking the caller to enter a generated PIN.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Call Screening using a random PIN** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-call-screening-using">![Call Screening using a random PIN condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/call-screening-using-a-random-pin.png)<figcaption>Call Screening using a random PIN condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Call Screening using a random PIN.</td></tr><tr><td>Welcome Message</td><td>Prompt played before PIN entry.</td></tr><tr><td>Wrong PIN Message</td><td>Prompt played after an invalid PIN.</td></tr><tr><td>Max attempts</td><td>How many failed attempts are allowed.</td></tr><tr><td>Timeout</td><td>How long to wait for digits.</td></tr><tr><td>PIN length</td><td>Length of the generated PIN.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Call Screening Random PIN</td></tr><tr><td>PIN length</td><td>4</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Call Screening using a random PIN** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Caller has already called in

The **Caller has already called in** type checks recent inbound call history for the current caller.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Caller has already called in** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-caller-has-already-c">![Caller has already called in condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/caller-has-already-called-in.png)<figcaption>Caller has already called in condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Caller has already called in.</td></tr><tr><td>Lookup days</td><td>How many days back to search.</td></tr><tr><td>Lookup hours</td><td>How many hours back to search.</td></tr><tr><td>Match number of digits</td><td>How many rightmost caller ID digits to compare.</td></tr><tr><td>Disposition</td><td>Call result filter.</td></tr><tr><td>At least</td><td>Minimum call count and optional duration rule.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Caller Already Called In</td></tr><tr><td>Lookup hours</td><td>24</td></tr><tr><td>At least</td><td>1 time</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Caller has already called in** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Caller has been called out

The **Caller has been called out** type checks recent outbound call history for the current caller.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Caller has been called out** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-caller-has-been-call">![Caller has been called out condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/caller-has-been-called-out.png)<figcaption>Caller has been called out condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Caller has been called out.</td></tr><tr><td>Lookup days</td><td>How many days back to search.</td></tr><tr><td>Lookup hours</td><td>How many hours back to search.</td></tr><tr><td>Match number of digits</td><td>How many rightmost caller ID digits to compare.</td></tr><tr><td>Disposition</td><td>Call result filter.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Caller Already Called Out</td></tr><tr><td>Lookup hours</td><td>24</td></tr><tr><td>Disposition</td><td>Answered</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Caller has been called out** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# Queue Callers, more than

The **Queue Callers, more than** type matches when a selected queue has more than the configured number of callers waiting.

Open **Configuration &gt; Conditions**, select **New Condition**, enter a name, choose **Queue Callers, more than** in the Type field, complete the type-specific fields, and select **Save**.

<figure id="bkmrk-queue-callers%2C-more-">![Queue Callers, more than condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/queue-callers-more-than.png)<figcaption>Queue Callers, more than condition edit form in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Fields

<table id="bkmrk-field-or-optiondescr"><thead><tr><th>Field or option</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in condition lists and selectors.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Select Queue Callers, more than.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue</td><td>Queue to monitor.</td></tr><tr><td>More than # callers</td><td>Waiting caller threshold.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Example

<table id="bkmrk-fieldexample-value-n"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Example value</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Docs Condition - Queue Callers More Than</td></tr><tr><td>Queue</td><td>Accounting</td></tr><tr><td>More than # callers</td><td>3</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Destinations

For tenant conditions, select the destinations that should run when the condition matches and when it does not match. Global conditions are referenced by tenant-level Use a Global Condition records.

## Editing and deleting

To edit this condition, open **Docs Condition - Queue Callers, more than** from the Conditions list, adjust the fields, and select **Save**. Before deleting it, check IVRs, schedules, routes, feature codes, and other call-flow objects that may reference it.

# IVRs

# Overview

The **IVRs** page builds interactive voice response menus that collect DTMF or speech input and route callers. Open it from **Configuration &gt; IVRs**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-ivrs-list-page-in-th">![IVRs list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/qxMivrs-list.png)<figcaption>IVRs list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New IVR action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the IVR from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the IVR and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New IVR</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new ivr.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Welcome Message</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow Dialing Extensions</td><td>Target or routing selection used when the object sends a call or message onward.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow Dialing Feature Codes</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Action</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo IVR 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a IVR, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit IVRs

Use this page when creating a new IVR or editing an existing IVR from **Configuration &gt; IVRs**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-ivrs-add%2Fedit-form.">![IVRs add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/FGjivrs-form.png)<figcaption>IVRs add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Type:</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Speech to Text Language:</td><td>Language or voice selection used for prompts, transcription, or speech synthesis.</td></tr><tr><td>Min silence time (ms):</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Silence threshold:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Messages playback:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Menu selection timeout:</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>Digit timeout:</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>Max loop counts:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Loop on timeout</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>Loop on wrong key press/word</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow dialing internal numbers</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Allowed numbers:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow Custom Codes</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow Dialing Feature Codes</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the IVRs list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing IVR, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a IVR, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Hunt Lists

# Overview

The **Hunt Lists** page routes a call across multiple destinations using ring-all, sequence, cycle, or loop behavior. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Hunt Lists**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-hunt-lists-list-page">![Hunt Lists list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/fYhhunt-lists-list.png)<figcaption>Hunt Lists list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New hunt list action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the hunt list from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the hunt list and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Hunt List</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new hunt list.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Peer List</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Action</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Hunt 1 and Docs Demo Hunt 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a hunt list, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Hunt Lists

Use this page when creating a new hunt list or editing an existing hunt list from **Configuration &gt; Hunt Lists**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-hunt-lists-add%2Fedit-">![Hunt Lists add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/LlYhunt-lists-form.png)<figcaption>Hunt Lists add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Number:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Type:</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Use fast dialing</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Use Default Music On Hold instead of ringing</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Skip if exten is in use</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Skip if exten is offline</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow extension redirect</td><td>Target or routing selection used when the object sends a call or message onward.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow FMFM</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow additional destinations</td><td>Target or routing selection used when the object sends a call or message onward.</td></tr><tr><td>Use Custom Destination details</td><td>Target or routing selection used when the object sends a call or message onward.</td></tr><tr><td>Request confirm to answer</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Confirm message:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Ring time:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Dial timeout:</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Hunt Lists list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing hunt list, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a hunt list, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Conference Rooms

# Overview

The **Conference Rooms** page creates dial-in conference rooms with optional PINs, limits, announcements, and recording options. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Conference Rooms**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-conference-rooms-lis">![Conference Rooms list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/6RYconference-rooms-list.png)<figcaption>Conference Rooms list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New conference room action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the conference room from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the conference room and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Conference Room</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new conference room.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>PIN</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Admin PIN</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Max Allowed</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Conference 1 and Docs Demo Conference 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a conference room, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Conference Rooms

Use this page when creating a new conference room or editing an existing conference room from **Configuration &gt; Conference Rooms**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-conference-rooms-add">![Conference Rooms add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/3fLconference-rooms-form.png)<figcaption>Conference Rooms add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Number:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Available from - to:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>PIN:</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Admin PIN:</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Call Rate:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>announcecount</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>announcenamereview</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>announcenamenoreview</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>playmoh</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>allowmenu</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>allowadminmenu</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>donotplaymessage</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>startwhenadmin</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>joinusermuted</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>quiet</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>endwhenadmin</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>talkeroptimization</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>talkeradminoptimization</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>record</td><td>Recording behavior or recording delivery setting.</td></tr><tr><td>Request PIN message:</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Correct PIN message:</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Correct admin PIN message:</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Max user allowed:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Send conference report to:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Conference Server:</td><td>Server, host, or node selection used by the object.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Conference Rooms list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing conference room, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a conference room, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Queues

# Overview

The **Queues** page defines call queues, agent behavior, announcements, callbacks, and queue reporting settings. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Queues**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-queues-list-page-in-">![Queues list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ggmqueues-list.png)<figcaption>Queues list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New queue action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the queue from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the queue and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Queue</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new queue.</td></tr><tr><td>External Agents</td><td>Runs the External Agents action.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue rules</td><td>Runs the Queue rules action.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr><tr><td>Assign</td><td>Runs the Assign action.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Strategy</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Always Record</td><td>Recording behavior or recording delivery setting.</td></tr><tr><td>\# Agents</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>\# Callers</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Action</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Queue 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a queue, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Queues

Use this page when creating a new queue or editing an existing queue from **Configuration &gt; Queues**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Form sections

<table id="bkmrk-sectiondescription-i"><thead><tr><th>Section</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Information</td><td>Core identity and routing fields for the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Agents</td><td>Agent assignment and queue membership behavior.</td></tr><tr><td>Periodic Announce</td><td>Settings shown in the Periodic Announce block.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue exit key</td><td>Settings shown in the Queue exit key block.</td></tr><tr><td>Call Back service</td><td>Settings shown in the Call Back service block.</td></tr><tr><td>Abandoned Calls</td><td>Settings shown in the Abandoned Calls block.</td></tr><tr><td>Position/Time Announce</td><td>Settings shown in the Position/Time Announce block.</td></tr><tr><td>API Integrations</td><td>API-related credentials, restrictions, and integration controls.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Y1pqueues-form-section-1.png)<figcaption>Information section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Core identity and routing fields for the object.

### Agents

<figure id="bkmrk-agents-section-on-th">![Agents section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/bjQqueues-form-section-2.png)<figcaption>Agents section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Agent assignment and queue membership behavior.

### Periodic Announce

<figure id="bkmrk-periodic-announce-se">![Periodic Announce section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/2vWqueues-form-section-3.png)<figcaption>Periodic Announce section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Periodic Announce block.

### Queue exit key

<figure id="bkmrk-queue-exit-key-secti">![Queue exit key section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/EQuqueues-form-section-4.png)<figcaption>Queue exit key section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Queue exit key block.

### Call Back service

<figure id="bkmrk-call-back-service-se">![Call Back service section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/1Uuqueues-form-section-5.png)<figcaption>Call Back service section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Call Back service block.

### Abandoned Calls

<figure id="bkmrk-abandoned-calls-sect">![Abandoned Calls section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Fnhqueues-form-section-6.png)<figcaption>Abandoned Calls section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Abandoned Calls block.

### Position/Time Announce

<figure id="bkmrk-position%2Ftime-announ-1">![Position/Time Announce section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Suhqueues-form-section-7.png)<figcaption>Position/Time Announce section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Position/Time Announce block.

### API Integrations

<figure id="bkmrk-api-integrations-sec">![API Integrations section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/GY3queues-form-section-8.png)<figcaption>API Integrations section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>API-related credentials, restrictions, and integration controls.

## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Number:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Always Record:</td><td>Recording behavior or recording delivery setting.</td></tr><tr><td>Email recording to:</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Minimum Size (bytes):</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Play to the caller:</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue timeout:</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>Service level:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Max Queue Length:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Weight:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Auto fill:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue rule:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue min penalty:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue max penalty:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue raise penalty:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Progress:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue server:</td><td>Server, host, or node selection used by the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Strategy:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>allowoptimization</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Ring when in use:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Ring when offline:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Available Agent ringing:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Report caller's hold time:</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Agent timeout:</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>Wrap-up time:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Wait time for retry:</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>Penalty members limit:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Auto pause:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Queues list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing queue, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a queue, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Custom Destinations

# Overview

The **Custom Destinations** page defines reusable routing destinations for special actions, custom dial strings, wait steps, AI flows, and other call-flow functions. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Custom Destinations**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-custom-destinations-">![Custom Destinations list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/7sKcustom-destinations-list.png)<figcaption>Custom Destinations list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New custom destination action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the custom destination from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the custom destination and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Custom Destination</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new custom destination.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-ty"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Type</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Parameter</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Action</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Wait 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a custom destination, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Custom Destinations

Use this page when creating a new custom destination or editing an existing custom destination from **Configuration &gt; Custom Destinations**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-custom-destinations-">![Custom Destinations add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/UvAcustom-destinations-form.png)<figcaption>Custom Destinations add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-typ"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Type:</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Phone number:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Dial timeout:</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID Number:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Add diversion header:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Diversion header CallerID Number:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Min silence time (ms):</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Silence threshold:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller buddy language:</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Called buddy language:</td><td>Language or voice selection used for prompts, transcription, or speech synthesis.</td></tr><tr><td>Generative Artificial Intelligence:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>API key:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Model:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>System Content:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>User Content:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Assistant Content:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Functions:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Greeting Message:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Temperature:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Max Tokens:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Realtime Voice:</td><td>Language or voice selection used for prompts, transcription, or speech synthesis.</td></tr><tr><td>Turn Detection:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Semantic VAD eagerness:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Server VAD threshold:</td><td>Server, host, or node selection used by the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Prefix padding (ms):</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Silence duration (ms):</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Custom Destinations list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing custom destination, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a custom destination, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Feature Codes

# Overview

The **Feature Codes** page maps dialable feature codes to PBX functions or feature-code destinations. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Feature Codes**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-feature-codes-list-p">![Feature Codes list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Fj2feature-codes-list.png)<figcaption>Feature Codes list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New feature code action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the feature code from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the feature code and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Feature</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new feature.</td></tr><tr><td>Map Features</td><td>Opens a related mapping page.</td></tr><tr><td>Dynamic Features</td><td>Runs the Dynamic Features action.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-co"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Code</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Comment</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr><tr><td>Action</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Feature 1 and Docs Demo Feature 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a feature code, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Feature Codes

Use this page when creating a new feature code or editing an existing feature code from **Configuration &gt; Feature Codes**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-feature-codes-add%2Fed">![Feature Codes add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/4Spfeature-codes-form.png)<figcaption>Feature Codes add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-cod"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Code:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Comment:</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Feature Codes list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing feature code, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a feature code, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Short Numbers

# Overview

The **Short Numbers** page maps short tenant numbers to full destination numbers for quick dialing. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Short Numbers**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-short-numbers-list-p">![Short Numbers list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/XVZshort-numbers-list.png)<figcaption>Short Numbers list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new short number. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing short number row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more short number rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-cs"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>CSV Load</td><td>Opens import or upload tools for bulk data.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-sh"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Short Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Full Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Comment</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr><tr><td>No records to view</td><td>Recording behavior or recording delivery setting.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 3 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Short 1, Docs Demo Short 2, and Docs Demo Short 3.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a short number, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Call, SMS, and Fax Campaigns

# Overview

The **Call, SMS, and Fax Campaigns** page creates outbound voice, SMS, or fax campaigns with scheduling, state, retry, and destination behavior. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Call/SMS/FAX Campaigns**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-call%2C-sms%2C-and-fax-c">![Call, SMS, and Fax Campaigns list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Twocall-sms-and-fax-campaigns-list.png)<figcaption>Call, SMS, and Fax Campaigns list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New campaign action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the campaign from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the campaign and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Campaign</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new campaign.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr><tr><td>Find</td><td>Searches for the number or record entered in the find field.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Tech</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Start</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>End</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Calls Running / Max</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Max Attempts</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>\# Numbers/Max</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>State</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Campaign 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a campaign, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Call, SMS, and Fax Campaigns

Use this page when creating a new campaign or editing an existing campaign from **Configuration &gt; Call, SMS, and Fax Campaigns**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Form sections

<table id="bkmrk-sectiondescription-i"><thead><tr><th>Section</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Information</td><td>Core identity and routing fields for the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Voice</td><td>Voice calling behavior, caller handling, recording, and voice-specific limits.</td></tr><tr><td>Parameters</td><td>Additional runtime parameters used by the object.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/D6rcall-sms-and-fax-campaigns-form-section-1.png)<figcaption>Information section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Core identity and routing fields for the object.

### Voice

<figure id="bkmrk-voice-section-on-the">![Voice section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/eJBcall-sms-and-fax-campaigns-form-section-2.png)<figcaption>Voice section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Voice calling behavior, caller handling, recording, and voice-specific limits.

### Parameters

<figure id="bkmrk-parameters-section-o">![Parameters section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/LFJcall-sms-and-fax-campaigns-form-section-3.png)<figcaption>Parameters section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Additional runtime parameters used by the object.

## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID:</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Tech:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Type:</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Start:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>End:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Week Time condition:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Max # of campaign numbers:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Dial timeout:</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>On connect callerid name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>confirm</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Confirm message:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Max Channels:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Check queue for free agents:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Allowed channels for each of the free agents:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Min num of free agents:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Max Attempts:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Sum other campaigns</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Delay Between Attempts:</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>Always Record:</td><td>Recording behavior or recording delivery setting.</td></tr><tr><td>Email recording to:</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Minimum Size (bytes):</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Fax quality:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Page size:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Page rotate:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>File in PDF or TIFF format:</td><td>File upload or file name used by the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Message:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Call, SMS, and Fax Campaigns list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing campaign, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a campaign, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# AGI Scripts

# Overview

The **AGI Scripts** page registers AGI script definitions that can be used by routing objects and call-flow actions. Open it from **Configuration &gt; AGI Scripts**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-agi-scripts-list-pag">![AGI Scripts list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/hzlagi-scripts-list.png)<figcaption>AGI Scripts list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New AGI script action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the AGI script from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the AGI script and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Path</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Parameters</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Param. 1</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Param. 2</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Param. 3</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Param. 4</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Param. 5</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo AGI 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a AGI script, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit AGI Scripts

Use this page when creating a new AGI script or editing an existing AGI script from **Configuration &gt; AGI Scripts**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-agi-scripts-add%2Fedit">![AGI Scripts add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/UCdagi-scripts-form.png)<figcaption>AGI Scripts add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the AGI Scripts list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing AGI script, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a AGI script, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Voicemails

&lt;p&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

# Overview

The **Voicemails** page manages voicemail boxes, message retention, greetings, notification, transcript, and escalation behavior. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Voicemails**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

## Display modes

The Voicemails page can be shown in DataTable mode or jqGrid mode. Use the display mode toggle in the toolbar to switch between them.

### DataTable mode

<figure id="bkmrk-voicemails-page-in-d">![Voicemails page in DataTable display mode.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/qaovoicemails-datatable.png)<figcaption>Voicemails page in DataTable display mode.</figcaption></figure>DataTable mode shows the standard table with search, sorting, page-size selection, row checkboxes, and bulk actions.

### jqGrid mode

<figure id="bkmrk-voicemails-page-in-j">![Voicemails page in jqGrid display mode.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/W3zvoicemails-jqgrid.png)<figcaption>Voicemails page in jqGrid display mode.</figcaption></figure>jqGrid mode shows the same voicemail records in an advanced grid with column filters and grid toolbar actions.

## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New voicemail mailbox action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the voicemail mailbox from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the voicemail mailbox and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Voicemail</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new voicemail.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr><tr><td>Enable jqGrid</td><td>Switches the table display mode for advanced grid controls.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-ma"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Mailbox</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>PIN</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Email</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Pager</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Attach</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Language</td><td>Language or voice selection used for prompts, transcription, or speech synthesis.</td></tr><tr><td>Actions</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Mailbox 1 and Docs Demo Mailbox 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a voicemail mailbox, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Voicemails

Use this page when creating a new voicemail mailbox or editing an existing voicemail mailbox from **Configuration &gt; Voicemails**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Form sections

<table id="bkmrk-sectiondescription-i"><thead><tr><th>Section</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Information</td><td>Core identity and routing fields for the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Messages</td><td>Settings shown in the Messages block.</td></tr><tr><td>Operator/Extras</td><td>Settings shown in the Operator/Extras block.</td></tr><tr><td>Greetings</td><td>Settings shown in the Greetings block.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/hohvoicemails-form-section-1.png)<figcaption>Information section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Core identity and routing fields for the object.

### Messages

<figure id="bkmrk-messages-section-on-">![Messages section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Fv8voicemails-form-section-2.png)<figcaption>Messages section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Messages block.

### Operator/Extras

<figure id="bkmrk-operator%2Fextras-sect">![Operator/Extras section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/QJlvoicemails-form-section-3.png)<figcaption>Operator/Extras section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Operator/Extras block.

### Greetings

<figure id="bkmrk-greetings-section-on">![Greetings section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/J1hvoicemails-form-section-4.png)<figcaption>Greetings section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Greetings block.

## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-mai"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Mailbox:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>PIN:</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Email:</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Timezone:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Pager:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Envelope playback:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Say Caller ID:</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Attach message:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Store transcript and summary:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Generate transcript:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Generate summary:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Automatic delete:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete older messages:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow review:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow callback:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow dialout:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Play a message after the other:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Include in Dial By Name Directory:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Greeting:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Language:</td><td>Language or voice selection used for prompts, transcription, or speech synthesis.</td></tr><tr><td>Max number of messages:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Min len of a voicemail message in seconds:</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Max len of a voicemail message in seconds:</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Backup messages:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>On new message:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>URL:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>POST data:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Voicemails list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing voicemail mailbox, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a voicemail mailbox, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Phones

# Overview

The **Phones** page defines provisioned phones, device models, MAC addresses, line assignments, and provisioning secrets. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Provisioning &gt; Phones**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-phones-list-page-in-">![Phones list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/17Bphones-list.png)<figcaption>Phones list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New phone action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the phone from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the phone and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Phone</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new phone.</td></tr><tr><td>Resync config</td><td>Sends the selected device operation to the selected phones.</td></tr><tr><td>Reboot</td><td>Sends the selected device operation to the selected phones.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Phone Model</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Extensions</td><td>Target or routing selection used when the object sends a call or message onward.</td></tr><tr><td>MAC plain</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Autoprovisioning URL</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Phone 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a phone, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Phones

Use this page when creating a new phone or editing an existing phone from **Configuration &gt; Phones**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-phones-add%2Fedit-form">![Phones add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ufSphones-form.png)<figcaption>Phones add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Virtual phone provisioning</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Model:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>MAC Address:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Secret:</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Accept data from phone</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Optional file name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>HTTP/S Username:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>HTTP/S Password:</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Line 0:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Line 1:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Line 2:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Line 3:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Line 4:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Line 5:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Phones list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing phone, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a phone, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Button Layouts

# Overview

The **Button Layouts** page defines reusable phone button ranges, layout templates, and phone-book button behavior. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Provisioning &gt; Button Layouts**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-button-layouts-list-">![Button Layouts list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/lNEbutton-layouts-list.png)<figcaption>Button Layouts list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New button layout action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the button layout from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the button layout and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Button Layout</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new button layout.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Template</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Code</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Start</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>End</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Actions</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Buttons 1 and Docs Demo Buttons 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a button layout, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Button Layouts

Use this page when creating a new button layout or editing an existing button layout from **Configuration &gt; Button Layouts**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-button-layouts-add%2Fe">![Button Layouts add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/azlbutton-layouts-form.png)<figcaption>Button Layouts add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Button Layout Template:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Code:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>usephonebook</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Phone Book:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Start:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>End:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Button Layouts list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing button layout, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a button layout, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Custom Files

# Overview

The **Custom Files** page uploads custom provisioning files matched to phones by user-agent rules. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Provisioning &gt; Custom Files**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-custom-files-list-pa">![Custom Files list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/c0rcustom-files-list.png)<figcaption>Custom Files list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New custom file action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the custom file from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the custom file and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Custom File</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new custom file.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Description</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr><tr><td>User agent regex</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Size</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Custom File 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a custom file, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Custom Files

Use this page when creating a new custom file or editing an existing custom file from **Configuration &gt; Custom Files**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-custom-files-add%2Fedi">![Custom Files add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Pxfcustom-files-form.png)<figcaption>Custom Files add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Description:</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr><tr><td>User agent regex:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>File:</td><td>File upload or file name used by the object.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Custom Files list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing custom file, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a custom file, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Music on Hold

# Overview

The **Music on Hold** page defines music-on-hold classes, playback format, streaming source, order, and default behavior. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Music On Hold**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-music-on-hold-list-p">![Music on Hold list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/dLXmusic-on-hold-list.png)<figcaption>Music on Hold list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New music on hold class action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the music on hold class from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the music on hold class and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-do"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Download</td><td>Downloads or exports the currently available data.</td></tr><tr><td>New Music On Hold</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new music on hold.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Media Files</td><td>File upload or file name used by the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Custom</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Randomize order</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Default</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo MOH 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a music on hold class, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Music on Hold

Use this page when creating a new music on hold class or editing an existing music on hold class from **Configuration &gt; Music on Hold**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Form sections

<table id="bkmrk-sectiondescription-i"><thead><tr><th>Section</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Information</td><td>Core identity and routing fields for the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Streaming source</td><td>Settings shown in the Streaming source block.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/spqmusic-on-hold-form-section-1.png)<figcaption>Information section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Core identity and routing fields for the object.

### Streaming source

<figure id="bkmrk-streaming-source-sec">![Streaming source section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/2VWmusic-on-hold-form-section-2.png)<figcaption>Streaming source section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Streaming source block.

## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Randomize order</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Use standard application</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>MOH application:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>URL / Custom command:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Volume:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Format:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Streaming Engine:</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Default</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Music on Hold list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing music on hold class, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a music on hold class, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Paging and Intercoms

# Overview

The **Paging and Intercoms** page creates paging and intercom groups with announcement, bidirectional audio, and SIP header behavior. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Paging &amp; Intercoms**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-paging-and-intercoms">![Paging and Intercoms list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/KTMpaging-and-intercoms-list.png)<figcaption>Paging and Intercoms list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New paging and intercom group action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the paging and intercom group from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the paging and intercom group and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Paging and Intercom Group</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new paging and intercom group.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-nu"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Bidirectional</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Peer List</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Paging 1 and Docs Demo Paging 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a paging and intercom group, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Paging and Intercoms

Use this page when creating a new paging or intercom entry or editing an existing paging or intercom entry from **Configuration &gt; Paging and Intercoms**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-paging-and-intercoms">![Paging and Intercoms add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/oQlpaging-and-intercoms-form.png)<figcaption>Paging and Intercoms add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-num"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Number:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Bidirectional:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Check if exten are in use</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Set the SIP headers manually</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Announcement:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Paging and Intercoms list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing paging or intercom entry, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a paging or intercom entry, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Flows and Variables

# Overview

The **Flows and Variables** page defines tenant variables and flow state values that can be monitored or referenced by routing logic. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Flows &amp; Variables**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-flows-and-variables-">![Flows and Variables list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/3rcflows-and-variables-list.png)<figcaption>Flows and Variables list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New flow or variable action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the flow or variable from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the flow or variable and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Flow/Variable</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new flow/variable.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Comment</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr><tr><td>State</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Variable</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Value</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Action</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Flow 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a flow or variable, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Flows and Variables

Use this page when creating a new flow or variable or editing an existing flow or variable from **Configuration &gt; Flows and Variables**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Form sections

<table id="bkmrk-sectiondescription-i"><thead><tr><th>Section</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Information</td><td>Core identity and routing fields for the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Settings</td><td>Object-specific settings that change runtime behavior.</td></tr><tr><td>Monitoring</td><td>Status monitoring and BLF-related options.</td></tr><tr><td>Current State</td><td>Current value or state controls shown for the object.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/USDflows-and-variables-form-section-1.png)<figcaption>Information section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Core identity and routing fields for the object.

### Settings

<figure id="bkmrk-settings-section-on-">![Settings section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/r0Fflows-and-variables-form-section-2.png)<figcaption>Settings section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Object-specific settings that change runtime behavior.

### Monitoring

<figure id="bkmrk-monitoring-section-o">![Monitoring section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/tIhflows-and-variables-form-section-3.png)<figcaption>Monitoring section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Status monitoring and BLF-related options.

### Current State

<figure id="bkmrk-current-state-sectio">![Current State section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/WHJflows-and-variables-form-section-4.png)<figcaption>Current State section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Current value or state controls shown for the object.

## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Number:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Comment:</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr><tr><td>Variable name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Value for Unavailable:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Value for Not in use:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Value for In use:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Value for Ringing:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Monitor type:</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Queue:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Extension to monitor:</td><td>Target or routing selection used when the object sends a call or message onward.</td></tr><tr><td>DID to monitor:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Variable value:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>BLF Status:</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Flows and Variables list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing flow or variable, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a flow or variable, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# DISAs

# Overview

The **DISAs** page creates DISA access points for authenticated outbound calling through the PBX. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; DISAs**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-disas-list-page-in-t">![DISAs list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/0Yfdisas-list.png)<figcaption>DISAs list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New DISA action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the DISA from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the DISA and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New DISA</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new disa.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Recording</td><td>Recording behavior or recording delivery setting.</td></tr><tr><td>PIN</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Outbound</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo DISA 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a DISA, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit DISAs

Use this page when creating a new DISA or editing an existing DISA from **Configuration &gt; DISAs**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-disas-add%2Fedit-form.">![DISAs add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/2zAdisas-form.png)<figcaption>DISAs add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Welcome Message:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>PIN:</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Digits Timeout:</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>Response Timeout:</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>Loop on attempt</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Allow outbound calls</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Block External Caller ID</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Use CID Number:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Use CID Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the DISAs list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing DISA, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a DISA, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Caller ID Blacklist

# Overview

The **Caller ID Blacklist** page blocks or annotates caller IDs that should not be accepted normally by tenant routing. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; CallerID Black List**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-caller-id-blacklist-">![Caller ID Blacklist list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/nECcaller-id-blacklist-list.png)<figcaption>Caller ID Blacklist list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new caller ID blacklist entry. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing caller ID blacklist entry row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more caller ID blacklist entry rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-cs"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>CSV Download</td><td>Opens import or upload tools for bulk data.</td></tr><tr><td>CSV/XLS Upload</td><td>Opens import or upload tools for bulk data.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-ca"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Caller ID</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Inserted</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Reason</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>No records to view</td><td>Recording behavior or recording delivery setting.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Block 1 and Docs Demo Block 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a caller ID blacklist entry, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Conduits

# Overview

The **Conduits** page defines prefixes used to route calls between tenant boundaries through tenant conduits. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Conduits**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-conduits-list-page-i">![Conduits list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/nnzconduits-list.png)<figcaption>Conduits list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new conduit. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing conduit row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more conduit rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-pr"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Prefix</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Globalemptyempty</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Tenant</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Alter CallerID</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>emptyx</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>No records to view</td><td>Recording behavior or recording delivery setting.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: 9901.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a conduit, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Email Templates

# Overview

The **Email Templates** page builds tenant email templates for voicemail, fax, and other notification types. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Email Templates**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-email-templates-list">![Email Templates list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/UTaemail-templates-list.png)<figcaption>Email Templates list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New email template action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the email template from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the email template and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Email Template</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new email template.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr><tr><td>Test</td><td>Runs a test for the selected configuration.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Active</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Language</td><td>Language or voice selection used for prompts, transcription, or speech synthesis.</td></tr><tr><td>Sender Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Sender Email</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Subject</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Actions</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Email 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a email template, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Email Templates

Use this page when creating a new email template or editing an existing email template from **Configuration &gt; Email Templates**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-email-templates-add%2F">![Email Templates add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/54Hemail-templates-form.png)<figcaption>Email Templates add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Type:</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Active:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Language:</td><td>Language or voice selection used for prompts, transcription, or speech synthesis.</td></tr><tr><td>Sender Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Sender Email:</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Subject:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Email template:</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Text to display</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>To what URL should this link go?</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Select from files</td><td>File upload or file name used by the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Image URL</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Video URL (YouTube, Google Drive, Vimeo, Vine, Instagram, DailyMotion, Youku, Peertube)</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>allowattachment</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Email Templates list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing email template, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a email template, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Do Not and Only Allow Call Lists

# Overview

The **Do Not and Only Allow Call Lists** page defines reusable do-not-call or allow-only lists used by campaign and routing logic. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Do Not / Only Allow Call Lists**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-do-not-and-only-allo">![Do Not and Only Allow Call Lists list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Jhwdo-not-and-only-allow-call-lists-list.png)<figcaption>Do Not and Only Allow Call Lists list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New call list action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the call list from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the call list and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Do Not / Only Allow Call List</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new do not / only allow call list.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr><tr><td>Find</td><td>Searches for the number or record entered in the find field.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Description</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr><tr><td>Numbers</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Actions</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Call List 1 and Docs Demo Call List 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a call list, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Do Not and Only Allow Call Lists

Use this page when creating a new call list or editing an existing call list from **Configuration &gt; Do Not and Only Allow Call Lists**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-do-not-and-only-allo">![Do Not and Only Allow Call Lists add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/hSvdo-not-and-only-allow-call-lists-form.png)<figcaption>Do Not and Only Allow Call Lists add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Description:</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Do Not and Only Allow Call Lists list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing call list, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a call list, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Reports

# Overview

The **Reports** page schedules and defines tenant reports for CDR, inbound, outbound, and queue activity data. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Reports**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-reports-list-page-in">![Reports list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/sHmreports-list.png)<figcaption>Reports list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New report action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the report from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the report and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-sh"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Show Reports</td><td>Opens a related detail or results view.</td></tr><tr><td>New Report</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new report.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr><tr><td>Run</td><td>Runs the Run action.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Reserved</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Holding days</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Parameters</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Format</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Actions</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Report 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a report, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Reports

Use this page when creating a new report or editing an existing report from **Configuration &gt; Reports**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Form sections

<table id="bkmrk-sectiondescription-i"><thead><tr><th>Section</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Information</td><td>Core identity and routing fields for the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Page</td><td>Settings shown in the Page block.</td></tr><tr><td>Schedule</td><td>Scheduling controls for when the object runs.</td></tr><tr><td>Delivery</td><td>Email or output delivery settings.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/XTHreports-form-section-1.png)<figcaption>Information section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Core identity and routing fields for the object.

### Page

<figure id="bkmrk-page-section-on-the-">![Page section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Edireports-form-section-2.png)<figcaption>Page section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Page block.

### Schedule

<figure id="bkmrk-schedule-section-on-">![Schedule section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Ue1reports-form-section-3.png)<figcaption>Schedule section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Scheduling controls for when the object runs.

### Delivery

<figure id="bkmrk-delivery-section-on-">![Delivery section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ZqXreports-form-section-4.png)<figcaption>Delivery section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Email or output delivery settings.

## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Active:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Reserved</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Holding days:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Type:</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Timeframe:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Custom timeframe start:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Custom timeframe end:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Group by:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Direction:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>PIN list:</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Report calls with cost:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Disposition:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Order by:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Hourly details:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Reports list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing report, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a report, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Response Paths

# Overview

The **Response Paths** page stores XML response-path output data and retention settings for integrations. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Response Paths**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-response-paths-list-">![Response Paths list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/APrresponse-paths-list.png)<figcaption>Response Paths list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New response path action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the response path from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the response path and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Response Path</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new response path.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Hold Days</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Response 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a response path, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Response Paths

Use this page when creating a new response path or editing an existing response path from **Configuration &gt; Response Paths**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-response-paths-add%2Fe">![Response Paths add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ajLresponse-paths-form.png)<figcaption>Response Paths add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Hold Days:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>XML Output Data:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Response Paths list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing response path, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a response path, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Cronjobs

# Overview

The **Cronjobs** page defines scheduled tenant jobs and when they run. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Cronjobs**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-cronjobs-list-page-i">![Cronjobs list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/WQtcronjobs-list.png)<figcaption>Cronjobs list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New cronjob action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the cronjob from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the cronjob and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Cronjob</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new cronjob.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Active</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Minute</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Hour</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Day</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Month</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Year</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Weekday</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Timezone</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Last Started</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Last Ended</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Duration</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Action</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Cron 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a cronjob, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Cronjobs

Use this page when creating a new cronjob or editing an existing cronjob from **Configuration &gt; Cronjobs**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Form sections

<table id="bkmrk-sectiondescription-c"><thead><tr><th>Section</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Cronjob</td><td>Scheduling controls for when the object runs.</td></tr><tr><td>Schedule</td><td>Scheduling controls for when the object runs.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Cronjob

<figure id="bkmrk-cronjob-section-on-t">![Cronjob section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/AKmcronjobs-form-section-1.png)<figcaption>Cronjob section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Scheduling controls for when the object runs.

### Schedule

<figure id="bkmrk-schedule-section-on-">![Schedule section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/kApcronjobs-form-section-2.png)<figcaption>Schedule section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Scheduling controls for when the object runs.

## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Active:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Disable once run:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Run from node:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Hour:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Minute:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Timezone:</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Cronjobs list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing cronjob, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a cronjob, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Switchboards

# Overview

The **Switchboards** page creates switchboard definitions used by the tenant operator interface. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Switchboards**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-switchboards-list-pa">![Switchboards list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/O1Iswitchboards-list.png)<figcaption>Switchboards list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New switchboard action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the switchboard from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the switchboard and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Switchboard</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new switchboard.</td></tr><tr><td>Autocreate Default</td><td>Runs the Autocreate Default action.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Default</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Used By</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Actions</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Switchboard 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a switchboard, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Switchboards

Use this page when creating a new switchboard or editing an existing switchboard from **Configuration &gt; Switchboards**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-switchboards-add%2Fedi">![Switchboards add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/l7hswitchboards-form.png)<figcaption>Switchboards add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>default</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Switchboards list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing switchboard, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a switchboard, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Phone Books and Databases

# Overview

The **Phone Books and Databases** page maintains contact rows inside a selected phone book or database. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Phone Books/DBs &gt; Phone Books/Databases**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-phone-books-and-data">![Phone Books and Databases list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/lktphone-books-and-databases-list.png)<figcaption>Phone Books and Databases list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new phone book entry. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing phone book entry row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more phone book entry rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-cs"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>CSV/XLS Import</td><td>Opens import or upload tools for bulk data.</td></tr><tr><td>CSV Export</td><td>Opens import or upload tools for bulk data.</td></tr><tr><td>XLS Export</td><td>Opens import or upload tools for bulk data.</td></tr><tr><td>New Phone Book/DB</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new phone book/db.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Phone</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Mobile Phone</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Email</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Route to</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>No records to view</td><td>Recording behavior or recording delivery setting.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Include local extensions:</td><td>Target or routing selection used when the object sends a call or message onward.</td></tr><tr><td>Include short numbers:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Contact 1 and Docs Demo Contact 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a phone book entry, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Manage Phone Books and Databases

# Overview

The **Manage Phone Books and Databases** page creates and edits phone book containers and the fields included in each phone book. Open it from **Configuration &gt; More Configuration &gt; Phone Books/DBs &gt; Manage Phone Books/Databases**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-manage-phone-books-a">![Manage Phone Books and Databases list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Gzjmanage-phone-books-and-databases-list.png)<figcaption>Manage Phone Books and Databases list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New phone book action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the phone book from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the phone book and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Phone Book</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new phone book.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Include local extensions</td><td>Target or routing selection used when the object sends a call or message onward.</td></tr><tr><td>Include short numbers</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Entries</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Default</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>no</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Phone Book 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a phone book, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Phone Books and Databases

Use this page when creating a new phone book or database or editing an existing phone book or database from **Configuration &gt; Manage Phone Books and Databases**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-manage-phone-books-a">![Manage Phone Books and Databases add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/15vmanage-phone-books-and-databases-form.png)<figcaption>Manage Phone Books and Databases add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Main fields

<table id="bkmrk-fielddescription-nam"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name:</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Include local extensions:</td><td>Target or routing selection used when the object sends a call or message onward.</td></tr><tr><td>Include short numbers:</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Manage Phone Books and Databases list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing phone book or database, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a phone book or database, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Settings

# Overview

The **Settings** page edits tenant-wide dialing, recording, AI, fax, API, destination, security, and call settings. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-settings-list-page-i">![Settings list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/jmxsettings-list.png)<figcaption>Settings list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-edi"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Change the required settings and select Save. The page edits tenant settings directly.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>There is no delete action for the Settings page itself. Delete actions are handled on the linked object pages.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ed"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Runs the Edit action.</td></tr><tr><td>Speech to Text</td><td>Runs the Speech to Text action.</td></tr><tr><td>Test</td><td>Runs a test for the selected configuration.</td></tr><tr><td>Autofill</td><td>Runs the Autofill action.</td></tr><tr><td>Manage CNAM Cache</td><td>Opens the related management page.</td></tr><tr><td>Generate</td><td>Generates a value for the adjacent field.</td></tr><tr><td>Exceptions</td><td>Runs the Exceptions action.</td></tr><tr><td>Manage IP List</td><td>Opens the related management page.</td></tr><tr><td>Save</td><td>Saves the current form.</td></tr><tr><td>Manager Users</td><td>Opens the related management page.</td></tr><tr><td>Pickup group names</td><td>Runs the Pickup group names action.</td></tr><tr><td>Internal Phone Book</td><td>Runs the Internal Phone Book action.</td></tr><tr><td>Internal Routing Rules</td><td>Runs the Internal Routing Rules action.</td></tr><tr><td>Outbound PIN codes</td><td>Runs the Outbound PIN codes action.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Edit Settings

Use this page to edit tenant-wide settings from **Configuration &gt; Settings**. The settings are stored directly for the selected tenant, so review each block before saving.

The screenshots below show the form block by block in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

## Form sections

<table id="bkmrk-sectiondescription-s"><thead><tr><th>Section</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Settings</td><td>Object-specific settings that change runtime behavior.</td></tr><tr><td>Dialing</td><td>Settings shown in the Dialing block.</td></tr><tr><td>Diversion field for External Agents</td><td>Agent assignment and queue membership behavior.</td></tr><tr><td>Autocreated Custom Destination</td><td>Settings shown in the Autocreated Custom Destination block.</td></tr><tr><td>Recording</td><td>Recording storage and recording-related options.</td></tr><tr><td>Voice Synthesizer</td><td>Voice calling behavior, caller handling, recording, and voice-specific limits.</td></tr><tr><td>Speech to Text</td><td>Settings shown in the Speech to Text block.</td></tr><tr><td>Generative Artificial Intelligent chat models</td><td>Settings shown in the Generative Artificial Intelligent chat models block.</td></tr><tr><td>Dial By Name Directory</td><td>Settings shown in the Dial By Name Directory block.</td></tr><tr><td>CNAM service</td><td>Settings shown in the CNAM service block.</td></tr><tr><td>Faxing</td><td>Fax handling, quality, storage, delivery, and fax-specific transport settings.</td></tr><tr><td>MS Teams integration</td><td>Settings shown in the MS Teams integration block.</td></tr><tr><td>API Interface</td><td>API-related credentials, restrictions, and integration controls.</td></tr><tr><td>Default Music On Hold</td><td>Settings shown in the Default Music On Hold block.</td></tr><tr><td>Unassigned DID destination</td><td>Settings shown in the Unassigned DID destination block.</td></tr><tr><td>General DID destination</td><td>Settings shown in the General DID destination block.</td></tr><tr><td>General Outbound destination</td><td>Settings shown in the General Outbound destination block.</td></tr><tr><td>Emergency numbers notification</td><td>Settings shown in the Emergency numbers notification block.</td></tr><tr><td>Security</td><td>Tenant security, limits, and access controls.</td></tr><tr><td>Call Settings</td><td>Object-specific settings that change runtime behavior.</td></tr><tr><td>Outbound Calls</td><td>Settings shown in the Outbound Calls block.</td></tr><tr><td>CSV Exports</td><td>Settings shown in the CSV Exports block.</td></tr><tr><td>Voicemail Settings</td><td>Voice calling behavior, caller handling, recording, and voice-specific limits.</td></tr><tr><td>Voicemail backup</td><td>Voice calling behavior, caller handling, recording, and voice-specific limits.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Settings

<figure id="bkmrk-settings-section-on-">![Settings section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/xXRsettings-page-section-1.png)<figcaption>Settings section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Object-specific settings that change runtime behavior.

### Dialing

<figure id="bkmrk-dialing-section-on-t">![Dialing section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/zbSsettings-page-section-2.png)<figcaption>Dialing section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Dialing block.

### Diversion field for External Agents

<figure id="bkmrk-diversion-field-for--1">![Diversion field for External Agents section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/0cVsettings-page-section-3.png)<figcaption>Diversion field for External Agents section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Agent assignment and queue membership behavior.

### Autocreated Custom Destination

<figure id="bkmrk-autocreated-custom-d-1">![Autocreated Custom Destination section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/A6msettings-page-section-4.png)<figcaption>Autocreated Custom Destination section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Autocreated Custom Destination block.

### Recording

<figure id="bkmrk-recording-section-on">![Recording section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/s1Isettings-page-section-5.png)<figcaption>Recording section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Recording storage and recording-related options.

### Voice Synthesizer

<figure id="bkmrk-voice-synthesizer-se">![Voice Synthesizer section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Plusettings-page-section-6.png)<figcaption>Voice Synthesizer section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Voice calling behavior, caller handling, recording, and voice-specific limits.

### Speech to Text

The **Speech to Text** block configures the recognition engine used by the selected tenant. The screenshots use fictional values in the **Canistracci Oil** tenant. Do not save these values on a production system.

Choose **System Default** when the tenant should inherit the global engine and credentials. Choose a specific engine when this tenant needs its own language, endpoint, credentials, model, or provider-specific options.

#### System Default

<figure id="bkmrk-speech-to-text-setti">![Speech to Text settings for System Default with fictional documentation values.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/QRcsettings-speech-to-text-system-default.png)<figcaption>Speech to Text settings for System Default with fictional documentation values.</figcaption></figure><table id="bkmrk-fieldmeaning-engineu"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Meaning</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Engine</td><td>Use **System Default** to inherit the global Speech to Text engine. This is the normal choice when all tenants share the same transcription provider.</td></tr><tr><td>Language</td><td>Leave as **System Default** to inherit the global language selection. If a tenant override is available, select the language expected for that tenant audio.</td></tr><tr><td>Speech To Text Engine API password</td><td>Leave empty to inherit the global secret. Fill it only when the tenant must override the credential used by the inherited engine.</td></tr><tr><td>Minimum call time for transcript</td><td>Calls shorter than this number of seconds are not sent for transcription. This avoids sending very short recordings to the external service.</td></tr><tr><td>Test speech recognition</td><td>Upload a WAV file and select **Test** to verify the currently selected engine configuration before relying on it for call transcripts.</td></tr></tbody></table>

#### IBM Watson TTS

<figure id="bkmrk-speech-to-text-setti-1">![Speech to Text settings for IBM Watson TTS with fictional documentation values.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/i34settings-speech-to-text-ibm-watson-tts.png)<figcaption>Speech to Text settings for IBM Watson TTS with fictional documentation values.</figcaption></figure><table id="bkmrk-fieldmeaning-engines"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Meaning</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Engine</td><td>Selects IBM Watson as the tenant Speech to Text provider. The historical engine name includes TTS, but this block is used for speech recognition.</td></tr><tr><td>Full Endpoint URL</td><td>Watson recognition endpoint, including the service instance path. Use the recognize endpoint supplied by IBM for the tenant account or service instance.</td></tr><tr><td>Language</td><td>Recognition model used by Watson, such as an American English broadband model. Choose the model that matches the audio language and expected bandwidth.</td></tr><tr><td>Speech To Text Engine API username</td><td>Watson credential username. Many IBM deployments use `apikey` as the username when authenticating with an API key.</td></tr><tr><td>Speech To Text Engine API password</td><td>Watson API key or password. The screenshot uses a fictional value.</td></tr><tr><td>Minimum call time for transcript</td><td>Minimum recording duration, in seconds, before MiRTA PBX attempts transcription.</td></tr><tr><td>Test speech recognition</td><td>Runs a test upload through the configured Watson settings.</td></tr></tbody></table>

#### Nexiwave

<figure id="bkmrk-speech-to-text-setti-2">![Speech to Text settings for Nexiwave with fictional documentation values.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/tdWsettings-speech-to-text-nexiwave.png)<figcaption>Speech to Text settings for Nexiwave with fictional documentation values.</figcaption></figure><table id="bkmrk-fieldmeaning-engines-1"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Meaning</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Engine</td><td>Selects Nexiwave as the tenant Speech to Text provider.</td></tr><tr><td>Language</td><td>Language sent to Nexiwave for recognition. The installed option shown in the example is English.</td></tr><tr><td>Speech To Text Engine API username</td><td>Nexiwave account username for the tenant-specific integration.</td></tr><tr><td>Speech To Text Engine API password</td><td>Nexiwave password or API secret. The screenshot uses a fictional value.</td></tr><tr><td>Minimum call time for transcript</td><td>Minimum recording duration before the call is eligible for transcription.</td></tr><tr><td>Test speech recognition</td><td>Uploads a WAV file to test the configured Nexiwave credentials and language.</td></tr></tbody></table>

#### Google Cloud Speech to Text

<figure id="bkmrk-speech-to-text-setti-3">![Speech to Text settings for Google Cloud Speech to Text with fictional documentation values.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/DGrsettings-speech-to-text-google-cloud-speech-to-text.png)<figcaption>Speech to Text settings for Google Cloud Speech to Text with fictional documentation values.</figcaption></figure><table id="bkmrk-fieldmeaning-engines-2"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Meaning</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Engine</td><td>Selects Google Cloud Speech to Text for tenant transcription.</td></tr><tr><td>Language</td><td>Google recognition language code. Choose the language that best matches the callers; the example uses English (United States).</td></tr><tr><td>Speech To Text Engine API password</td><td>Google API key used when audio is submitted directly without a storage bucket. Leave empty only when the deployment inherits the value elsewhere.</td></tr><tr><td>JSON Service Account key</td><td>Service account JSON used when audio is uploaded to Google Cloud Storage before transcription. The account must have access to the bucket.</td></tr><tr><td>Bucket Name</td><td>Google Cloud Storage bucket used to stage audio for transcription. The bucket must already exist and be accessible by the service account.</td></tr><tr><td>Profanity filter</td><td>Controls whether Google should attempt to mask profanity in returned transcripts. Use **System Default** to inherit the global behavior, or force **Yes** or **No** for this tenant.</td></tr><tr><td>Minimum call time for transcript</td><td>Minimum recording duration before MiRTA PBX sends the call to Google.</td></tr><tr><td>Test speech recognition</td><td>Uploads a WAV file and validates the Google configuration.</td></tr></tbody></table>

#### AssemblyAI

<figure id="bkmrk-speech-to-text-setti-4">![Speech to Text settings for AssemblyAI with fictional documentation values.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/jmXsettings-speech-to-text-assemblyai.png)<figcaption>Speech to Text settings for AssemblyAI with fictional documentation values.</figcaption></figure><table id="bkmrk-fieldmeaning-engines-3"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Meaning</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Engine</td><td>Selects AssemblyAI as the tenant Speech to Text provider.</td></tr><tr><td>Endpoint server</td><td>AssemblyAI API host. Leave empty for the platform default, or set a host such as `api.assemblyai.com` when documenting or overriding the endpoint.</td></tr><tr><td>Model</td><td>AssemblyAI model used for the transcript request. Use the stronger model when accuracy matters, or a fallback combination when availability is more important.</td></tr><tr><td>Language</td><td>Language sent to AssemblyAI. **Automatic** lets AssemblyAI detect the language, while a specific language restricts recognition to that language.</td></tr><tr><td>Speech To Text Engine API password</td><td>AssemblyAI API token. The screenshot uses a fictional value.</td></tr><tr><td>Minimum call time for transcript</td><td>Minimum recording duration before the call is eligible for transcription.</td></tr><tr><td>Test speech recognition</td><td>Uploads a WAV file to test the AssemblyAI endpoint, model, token, and language choices.</td></tr></tbody></table>

Some installations also render AssemblyAI tuning fields for key terms and custom spelling. When present, use key terms to bias recognition toward tenant names or PBX terminology, and use custom spelling for corrections such as `heard term:correct spelling`.

#### GeminiAI

<figure id="bkmrk-speech-to-text-setti-5">![Speech to Text settings for GeminiAI with fictional documentation values.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ETysettings-speech-to-text-geminiai.png)<figcaption>Speech to Text settings for GeminiAI with fictional documentation values.</figcaption></figure><table id="bkmrk-fieldmeaning-engines-4"><thead><tr><th>Field</th><th>Meaning</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Engine</td><td>Selects GeminiAI for speech recognition through a generative AI model.</td></tr><tr><td>Model</td><td>Gemini model used for transcription. Select the model according to the required balance of speed, cost, and accuracy.</td></tr><tr><td>Model command</td><td>Instruction sent to the model for the transcription task. Leave it empty to use the default command, or provide tenant-specific instructions such as speaker separation and terminology handling.</td></tr><tr><td>Language</td><td>Recognition language. The GeminiAI language list can be left at the inherited value or set to an available language option such as any language.</td></tr><tr><td>Speech To Text Engine API password</td><td>Gemini API key. The screenshot uses a fictional value.</td></tr><tr><td>Minimum call time for transcript</td><td>Minimum recording duration before MiRTA PBX asks GeminiAI to transcribe the call.</td></tr><tr><td>Test speech recognition</td><td>Uploads a WAV file and verifies the GeminiAI model, command, key, and language settings.</td></tr></tbody></table>

#### Operational Notes

- Speech recognition is an external-service workflow. Confirm provider cost, privacy, retention, and data-processing requirements before enabling it for a tenant.
- The selected engine, language, credentials, and provider-specific fields are read when a recording is submitted for transcription. Changing these settings affects future transcription attempts.
- Use the test upload after changing credentials, language, endpoint, bucket, or model options. A successful test is the quickest confirmation that the tenant-level override is usable.

### Generative Artificial Intelligent chat models

<figure id="bkmrk-generative-artificia-1">![Generative Artificial Intelligent chat models section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/m1fsettings-page-section-8.png)<figcaption>Generative Artificial Intelligent chat models section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Generative Artificial Intelligent chat models block.

### Dial By Name Directory

<figure id="bkmrk-dial-by-name-directo-1">![Dial By Name Directory section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/4xksettings-page-section-9.png)<figcaption>Dial By Name Directory section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Dial By Name Directory block.

### CNAM service

<figure id="bkmrk-cnam-service-section">![CNAM service section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/fy7settings-page-section-10.png)<figcaption>CNAM service section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the CNAM service block.

### Faxing

<figure id="bkmrk-faxing-section-on-th">![Faxing section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/b1Nsettings-page-section-11.png)<figcaption>Faxing section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Fax handling, quality, storage, delivery, and fax-specific transport settings.

### MS Teams integration

<figure id="bkmrk-ms-teams-integration-1">![MS Teams integration section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/wK5settings-page-section-12.png)<figcaption>MS Teams integration section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the MS Teams integration block.

### API Interface

<figure id="bkmrk-api-interface-sectio">![API Interface section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ej5settings-page-section-13.png)<figcaption>API Interface section on the page.</figcaption></figure>API-related credentials, restrictions, and integration controls.

### Default Music On Hold

<figure id="bkmrk-default-music-on-hol-1">![Default Music On Hold section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/SRMsettings-page-section-14.png)<figcaption>Default Music On Hold section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Default Music On Hold block.

### Unassigned DID destination

<figure id="bkmrk-unassigned-did-desti-1">![Unassigned DID destination section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Of2settings-page-section-15.png)<figcaption>Unassigned DID destination section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Unassigned DID destination block.

### General DID destination

<figure id="bkmrk-general-did-destinat-1">![General DID destination section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/o7Bsettings-page-section-16.png)<figcaption>General DID destination section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the General DID destination block.

### General Outbound destination

<figure id="bkmrk-general-outbound-des-1">![General Outbound destination section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/tW2settings-page-section-17.png)<figcaption>General Outbound destination section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the General Outbound destination block.

### Emergency numbers notification

<figure id="bkmrk-emergency-numbers-no-1">![Emergency numbers notification section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/8O9settings-page-section-18.png)<figcaption>Emergency numbers notification section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Emergency numbers notification block.

### Security

<figure id="bkmrk-security-section-on-">![Security section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/WWvsettings-page-section-19.png)<figcaption>Security section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Tenant security, limits, and access controls.

### Call Settings

<figure id="bkmrk-call-settings-sectio">![Call Settings section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Tkbsettings-page-section-20.png)<figcaption>Call Settings section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Object-specific settings that change runtime behavior.

### Outbound Calls

<figure id="bkmrk-outbound-calls-secti">![Outbound Calls section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/KSSsettings-page-section-21.png)<figcaption>Outbound Calls section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Outbound Calls block.

### CSV Exports

<figure id="bkmrk-csv-exports-section-">![CSV Exports section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/LQKsettings-page-section-22.png)<figcaption>CSV Exports section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the CSV Exports block.

### Voicemail Settings

<figure id="bkmrk-voicemail-settings-s">![Voicemail Settings section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/SNXsettings-page-section-23.png)<figcaption>Voicemail Settings section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Voice calling behavior, caller handling, recording, and voice-specific limits.

### Voicemail backup

<figure id="bkmrk-voicemail-backup-sec">![Voicemail backup section on the page.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/PVmsettings-page-section-24.png)<figcaption>Voicemail backup section on the page.</figcaption></figure>Voice calling behavior, caller handling, recording, and voice-specific limits.

## Saving changes

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-edi"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Change the required tenant settings in the relevant block, then select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Linked pages</td><td>Use the buttons inside Settings to open related management pages such as CNAM cache, manager users, routing rules, and PIN codes.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Settings itself is not deleted. Delete actions are handled on the linked object pages.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Manage CNAM Cache

# Overview

The **Manage CNAM Cache** page stores manually entered or cached caller-name lookup results. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Manage CNAM Cache**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-manage-cnam-cache-li">![Manage CNAM Cache list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/3UWmanage-cnam-cache-list.png)<figcaption>Manage CNAM Cache list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new CNAM cache entry. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing CNAM cache entry row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more CNAM cache entry rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-nu"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Inserted</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Static</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Note</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo CNAM 1 and Docs Demo CNAM 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a CNAM cache entry, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Dialing Exceptions

# Overview

The **Dialing Exceptions** page controls which extensions can dial selected feature codes, patterns, or destination groups. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Exceptions**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-dialing-exceptions-l">![Dialing Exceptions list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/UP7dialing-exceptions-list.png)<figcaption>Dialing Exceptions list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-edi"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Change the checkbox matrix to allow or block specific dialing patterns, then save or test the result.</td></tr><tr><td>Test</td><td>Use the test controls to validate how a number is handled for a selected extension.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>There is no separate delete action because the page stores rule states, not independent rows.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-te"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Test</td><td>Runs a test for the selected configuration.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: an advanced dialing exception from **^10\[0-9\]$** to **^\\\*900$**.

# Manager Users

# Overview

The **Manager Users** page manages tenant manager credentials used for tenant-level management access. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Manager Users**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-manager-users-list-p">![Manager Users list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/dSQmanager-users-list.png)<figcaption>Manager Users list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New manager user action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the manager user from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the manager user and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Manager User</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new manager user.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-us"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Username</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Password</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Description</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: docs\_demo\_manager\_1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a manager user, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Manager Users

Use this page when creating a new manager user or editing an existing manager user from **Configuration &gt; Manager Users**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-manager-users-add%2Fed">![Manager Users add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/x9Gmanager-users-form.png)<figcaption>Manager Users add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Manager Users list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing manager user, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a manager user, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Pickup Group Names

# Overview

The **Pickup Group Names** page assigns friendly names to pickup group numbers. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Pickup group names**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-pickup-group-names-l">![Pickup Group Names list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/pklpickup-group-names-list.png)<figcaption>Pickup Group Names list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new pickup group name. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing pickup group name row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more pickup group name rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-gr"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Group Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Group Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Pickup 1 and Docs Demo Pickup 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a pickup group name, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Internal Phone Book

# Overview

The **Internal Phone Book** page shows the generated internal phone book built from extensions, short numbers, DIDs, and related tenant objects. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Internal Phone Book**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-internal-phone-book-">![Internal Phone Book list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/m0finternal-phone-book-list.png)<figcaption>Internal Phone Book list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-vie"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>View</td><td>Use search, sorting, and filtering to inspect records generated from other tenant objects.</td></tr><tr><td>Add/Edit/Delete</td><td>This page is generated from related configuration, so records are changed on their source pages.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-cs"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>CSV Export</td><td>Opens import or upload tools for bulk data.</td></tr><tr><td>XLS Export</td><td>Opens import or upload tools for bulk data.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-nu"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Type</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Description</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Extensions 100-109 and Docs Demo Short 1.

# Internal Routing Rules

# Overview

The **Internal Routing Rules** page applies regex-based rewriting and destination selection for internal dialing. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Internal Routing Rules**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-internal-routing-rul">![Internal Routing Rules list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/7m5internal-routing-rules-list.png)<figcaption>Internal Routing Rules list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New internal routing rule action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the internal routing rule from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the internal routing rule and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Internal Routing Rule</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new internal routing rule.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-re"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Regex</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Extension</td><td>Target or routing selection used when the object sends a call or message onward.</td></tr><tr><td>Digits to add</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Digits to del</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: ^99991$.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a internal routing rule, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Internal Routing Rules

Use this page when creating a new internal routing rule or editing an existing internal routing rule from **Configuration &gt; Internal Routing Rules**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-internal-routing-rul">![Internal Routing Rules add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/l9qinternal-routing-rules-form.png)<figcaption>Internal Routing Rules add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Internal Routing Rules list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing internal routing rule, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a internal routing rule, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Outbound PIN Codes

# Overview

The **Outbound PIN Codes** page creates PINs that can be required for outbound dialing authorization. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Outbound PIN codes**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-outbound-pin-codes-l">![Outbound PIN Codes list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/x3noutbound-pin-codes-list.png)<figcaption>Outbound PIN Codes list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New PIN code action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the PIN code from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the PIN code and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Pin Code</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new pin code.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr><tr><td>CSV Upload</td><td>Opens import or upload tools for bulk data.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-de"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Description</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr><tr><td>PIN</td><td>Credential or PIN value. Treat it as sensitive.</td></tr><tr><td>Disabled</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo PIN 1 and Docs Demo PIN 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a PIN code, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Outbound PIN Codes

Use this page when creating a new outbound PIN code or editing an existing outbound PIN code from **Configuration &gt; Outbound PIN Codes**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-outbound-pin-codes-a">![Outbound PIN Codes add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/5Eyoutbound-pin-codes-form.png)<figcaption>Outbound PIN Codes add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Outbound PIN Codes list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing outbound PIN code, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a outbound PIN code, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Parking Lot Return Numbers

# Overview

The **Parking Lot Return Numbers** page defines where parked calls return when parking times out. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Parking Lots return numbers**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-parking-lot-return-n">![Parking Lot Return Numbers list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/1B0parking-lot-return-numbers-list.png)<figcaption>Parking Lot Return Numbers list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new parking lot return number. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing parking lot return number row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more parking lot return number rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-pa"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Parking Lot Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Dial number On timeout</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Comment</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: Docs Demo Parking Return 1 and Docs Demo Parking Return 2.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a parking lot return number, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Custom Parking Lots

# Overview

The **Custom Parking Lots** page defines custom parking ranges, timeouts, default return numbers, and hold music. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Custom Parking Lots**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-custom-parking-lots-">![Custom Parking Lots list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/5Qpcustom-parking-lots-list.png)<figcaption>Custom Parking Lots list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new custom parking lot. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing custom parking lot row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more custom parking lot rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-pa"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Parking Lot Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Start</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>End</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Timeout</td><td>Timing value used by the service.</td></tr><tr><td>Parking lot server</td><td>Server, host, or node selection used by the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Default return number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Music on hold</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Parking 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a custom parking lot, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Call Privacy

# Overview

The **Call Privacy** page configures caller ID screening actions such as allow, deny, or no-answer behavior. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Call Privacy**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-call-privacy-list-pa">![Call Privacy list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Fdfcall-privacy-list.png)<figcaption>Call Privacy list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new call privacy rule. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing call privacy rule row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more call privacy rule rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-ca"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>CallerID</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Action</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Last seen</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 2 documentation demo records for this page: +15559011 and +15559012.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a call privacy rule, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Auto Answers

# Overview

The **Auto Answers** page defines SIP header/value pairs that trigger auto-answer behavior. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Auto Answers**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-auto-answers-list-pa">![Auto Answers list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/JqHauto-answers-list.png)<figcaption>Auto Answers list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new auto-answer header. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing auto-answer header row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more auto-answer header rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-si"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Sip header</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Sip header value</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>Comment</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Auto Answer 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a auto-answer header, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Additional Dial By Name Directories

# Overview

The **Additional Dial By Name Directories** page creates extra dial-by-name directories beyond the tenant default. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Additional Dial By Name directories**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-additional-dial-by-n">![Additional Dial By Name Directories list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/GsWadditional-dial-by-name-directories-list.png)<figcaption>Additional Dial By Name Directories list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New dial by name directory action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the dial by name directory from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the dial by name directory and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Dial By Name</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new dial by name.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Description</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr><tr><td>Numbers</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Directory 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a dial by name directory, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Additional Dial By Name Directories

Use this page when creating a new dial by name directory or editing an existing dial by name directory from **Configuration &gt; Additional Dial By Name Directories**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-additional-dial-by-n">![Additional Dial By Name Directories add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ONaadditional-dial-by-name-directories-form.png)<figcaption>Additional Dial By Name Directories add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Additional Dial By Name Directories list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing dial by name directory, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a dial by name directory, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Digital Faxes

# Overview

The **Digital Faxes** page defines internal numbers used for digital fax handling. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Digital Faxes**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-digital-faxes-list-p">![Digital Faxes list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/w2Edigital-faxes-list.png)<figcaption>Digital Faxes list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new digital fax number. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing digital fax number row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more digital fax number rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-nu"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Number</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Comment</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Digital Fax 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a digital fax number, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Alarms Binding

&lt;p&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

# Overview

The **Alarms Binding** page maps alarm caller IDs to tenant notification handling. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Alarms Binding**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-alarms-binding-list-">![Alarms Binding list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/lDZalarms-binding-list.png)<figcaption>Alarms Binding list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Use the grid add control to create a new alarm binding. Fill the row editor and save it.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Select an existing alarm binding row and use the grid edit control. Save the edited row.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select one or more alarm binding rows and use the grid delete control, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-te"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Tenant</td><td>Tenant associated with the alarm binding.</td></tr><tr><td>Caller ID</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Notification Email</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Relay Server</td><td>Server, host, or node selection used by the object.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The intended documentation demo caller ID for this page is **+15559101**. On the tested PBX server, the Alarms Binding grid returned an application error while creating or verifying this sample, so confirm the record after the grid is available.

## Deleting records

Before deleting an alarm binding, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Mail to Fax

# Overview

The **Mail to Fax** page configures mailboxes that turn received email into outbound faxes. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Mail to Fax**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-mail-to-fax-list-pag">![Mail to Fax list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/4mHmail-to-fax-list.png)<figcaption>Mail to Fax list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New mail-to-fax mailbox action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the mail-to-fax mailbox from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the mail-to-fax mailbox and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Mail to Fax</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new mail to fax.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Email</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Protocol</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Username</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Server</td><td>Server, host, or node selection used by the object.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Actions</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Mail to Fax 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a mail-to-fax mailbox, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Mail to Fax

Use this page when creating a new mail to fax rule or editing an existing mail to fax rule from **Configuration &gt; Mail to Fax**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-mail-to-fax-add%2Fedit">![Mail to Fax add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/1icmail-to-fax-form.png)<figcaption>Mail to Fax add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Mail to Fax list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing mail to fax rule, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a mail to fax rule, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# Mail to Call

# Overview

The **Mail to Call** page configures mailboxes that turn received email into outbound call jobs. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; Mail to Call**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-mail-to-call-list-pa">![Mail to Call list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/ghcmail-to-call-list.png)<figcaption>Mail to Call list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New mail-to-call mailbox action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the mail-to-call mailbox from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the mail-to-call mailbox and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New Mail to Call</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new mail to call.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Email</td><td>Email address used for notifications, delivery, or mailbox access.</td></tr><tr><td>Protocol</td><td>Mode selector that changes the behavior of the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Username</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Server</td><td>Server, host, or node selection used by the object.</td></tr><tr><td>CallerID</td><td>Caller ID or caller matching value.</td></tr><tr><td>Actions</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo Mail to Call 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a mail-to-call mailbox, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit Mail to Call

Use this page when creating a new mail to call rule or editing an existing mail to call rule from **Configuration &gt; Mail to Call**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Form sections

<table id="bkmrk-sectiondescription-i"><thead><tr><th>Section</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Information</td><td>Core identity and routing fields for the object.</td></tr><tr><td>Call details</td><td>Settings shown in the Call details block.</td></tr><tr><td>Text to Voice</td><td>Voice calling behavior, caller handling, recording, and voice-specific limits.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Information

<figure id="bkmrk-information-section-">![Information section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/Wlvmail-to-call-form-section-1.png)<figcaption>Information section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Core identity and routing fields for the object.

### Call details

<figure id="bkmrk-call-details-section">![Call details section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/aRwmail-to-call-form-section-2.png)<figcaption>Call details section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Settings shown in the Call details block.

### Text to Voice

<figure id="bkmrk-text-to-voice-sectio">![Text to Voice section on the edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/dgLmail-to-call-form-section-3.png)<figcaption>Text to Voice section on the edit form.</figcaption></figure>Voice calling behavior, caller handling, recording, and voice-specific limits.

## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the Mail to Call list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing mail to call rule, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a mail to call rule, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# XML Templates

# Overview

The **XML Templates** page stores reusable XML output templates for report or integration data. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; XML Templates**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-xml-templates-list-p">![XML Templates list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/leuxml-templates-list.png)<figcaption>XML Templates list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New XML template action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the XML template from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the XML template and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New XML Template</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new xml template.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-na"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Name</td><td>Display name used in lists and references.</td></tr><tr><td>Description</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: Docs Demo XML 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a XML template, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit XML Templates

Use this page when creating a new XML template or editing an existing XML template from **Configuration &gt; XML Templates**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-xml-templates-add%2Fed">![XML Templates add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/5fQxml-templates-form.png)<figcaption>XML Templates add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the XML Templates list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing XML template, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a XML template, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

# SIP Cause Codes

# Overview

The **SIP Cause Codes** page maps SIP cause codes and dispositions to routing destinations or handling rules. Open it from **Configuration &gt; Settings &gt; SIP Cause Codes**.

The page works against the tenant currently selected in the top bar. The screenshots and demo rows were captured in the **Canistracci OIL** tenant.

<figure id="bkmrk-sip-cause-codes-list">![SIP Cause Codes list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/1xZsip-cause-codes-list.png)<figcaption>SIP Cause Codes list page in the Canistracci OIL tenant.</figcaption></figure>## Working with objects

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-add"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add</td><td>Select the New SIP cause code rule action, complete the form, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the SIP cause code rule from the list by selecting its name, number, or row action. Change the form and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Select the row checkbox and use Delete Selected, or open the SIP cause code rule and select Delete, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page functions

<table id="bkmrk-actiondescription-ne"><thead><tr><th>Action</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New SIP Cause Code</td><td>Opens the creation form for a new sip cause code.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete Selected</td><td>Deletes the selected rows after confirmation.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## List columns

<table id="bkmrk-columndescription-di"><thead><tr><th>Column</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Disposition</td><td>Object setting shown by the form.</td></tr><tr><td>SIP Cause Code</td><td>Dialed value, identifier, or matching value used by the PBX.</td></tr><tr><td>Comment</td><td>Administrative note shown in lists and reports.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Demo records

The tenant contains 1 documentation demo record for this page: 599 Docs Demo 1.

## Deleting records

Before deleting a SIP cause code rule, check references from call flows, destinations, schedules, reports, or provisioning objects. MiRTA PBX asks for confirmation before the delete is submitted.

# Create and Edit SIP Cause Codes

Use this page when creating a new SIP cause code or editing an existing SIP cause code from **Configuration &gt; SIP Cause Codes**.

The form screenshots below are separated by block where the application exposes separate sections. Complete the required values, review routing or destination references, and save the record.

## Add and edit form

<figure id="bkmrk-sip-cause-codes-add%2F">![SIP Cause Codes add/edit form.](https://manual.mirtapbx.com/uploads/images/gallery/2026-06/UrBsip-cause-codes-form.png)<figcaption>SIP Cause Codes add/edit form.</figcaption></figure>## Saving and deleting

<table id="bkmrk-taskhow-to-do-it-cre"><thead><tr><th>Task</th><th>How to do it</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Create</td><td>Select the new action from the SIP Cause Codes list, fill the required fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Edit</td><td>Open the existing SIP cause code, update the needed fields, and select Save.</td></tr><tr><td>Delete</td><td>Before deleting a SIP cause code, check call-flow, destination, schedule, report, provisioning, or integration references. Use the row delete action or the form delete action when available, then confirm.</td></tr></tbody></table>